af841d403e
* src/ViewManager.py (_init_lists): Change Undo History binding to Ctrl+H because AltH was colliding with Help menu shortcut. In help: 2007-01-28 Alex Roitman <shura@gramps-project.org> * C/gramps.xml: Document the change. svn: r8004
8348 lines
324 KiB
XML
8348 lines
324 KiB
XML
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
|
|
|
|
<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
|
|
"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd">
|
|
<!--
|
|
User Manual for Gramps - a GTK+/GNOME based genealogy program
|
|
|
|
Copyright (C) 2003-2006 Alexander Roitman
|
|
|
|
This document is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
|
|
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
|
|
the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
|
|
(at your option) any later version.
|
|
|
|
This document is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
|
|
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
|
|
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
|
|
GNU General Public License for more details.
|
|
|
|
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
|
|
along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
|
|
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
|
|
|
|
-->
|
|
<book id="index" lang="en">
|
|
<!-- please do not change the id; for translations, change lang to -->
|
|
|
|
<!-- appropriate code -->
|
|
|
|
<bookinfo>
|
|
<title>GRAMPS Manual V2.9</title>
|
|
|
|
<abstract role="description">
|
|
<para>The GRAMPS Manual is the user manual helping users to find
|
|
their way around GRAMPS software. All aspects are covered,
|
|
including the general details, subtle tips, preferences, tools,
|
|
reports, etc.</para>
|
|
</abstract>
|
|
|
|
<copyright>
|
|
<year>2001</year>
|
|
|
|
<holder>Donald N. Allingham</holder>
|
|
</copyright>
|
|
|
|
<copyright>
|
|
<year>2003-2006</year>
|
|
|
|
<holder>Alex Roitman</holder>
|
|
</copyright>
|
|
|
|
<!-- translators: uncomment this:
|
|
|
|
<copyright>
|
|
<year>2002</year>
|
|
<holder>ME-THE-TRANSLATOR (Latin translation)</holder>
|
|
</copyright>
|
|
|
|
-->
|
|
|
|
<!--
|
|
An address can be added to the publisher information. If a role is
|
|
not specified, the publisher/author is the same for all versions of the
|
|
document.
|
|
-->
|
|
|
|
<publisher>
|
|
<publishername>GRAMPS Project</publishername>
|
|
</publisher>
|
|
|
|
<legalnotice id="legalnotice">
|
|
<para>This manual is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
|
|
modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published
|
|
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at
|
|
your option) any later version.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>This manual is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
|
|
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
|
|
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General
|
|
Public License for more details.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
|
|
along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
|
|
Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA</para>
|
|
</legalnotice>
|
|
|
|
<!--
|
|
This file contains link to license for the documentation (GNU GPL), and
|
|
other legal stuff such as "NO WARRANTY" statement.
|
|
-->
|
|
|
|
<authorgroup>
|
|
<author>
|
|
<firstname>Alex</firstname>
|
|
<surname>Roitman</surname>
|
|
|
|
<affiliation>
|
|
<orgname>GRAMPS Project</orgname>
|
|
<address><email>shura@gramps-project.org</email></address>
|
|
</affiliation>
|
|
</author>
|
|
|
|
<author>
|
|
<firstname>Donald N.</firstname>
|
|
<surname>Allingham</surname>
|
|
|
|
<affiliation>
|
|
<orgname>GRAMPS Project</orgname>
|
|
<address><email>don@gramps-project.org</email></address>
|
|
</affiliation>
|
|
</author>
|
|
|
|
<othercredit role="maintainer">
|
|
<firstname>Donald N.</firstname>
|
|
<surname>Allingham</surname>
|
|
<affiliation>
|
|
<orgname>GRAMPS Project</orgname>
|
|
<address> <email>don@gramps-project.org</email> </address>
|
|
</affiliation>
|
|
</othercredit>
|
|
|
|
<!--
|
|
This is appropriate place for other contributors: translators,
|
|
maintainers, etc. Commented out by default.
|
|
|
|
<othercredit role="translator">
|
|
<firstname>Latin</firstname>
|
|
<surname>Translator 1</surname>
|
|
<affiliation>
|
|
<orgname>Latin Translation Team</orgname>
|
|
<address> <email>translator@gnome.org</email> </address>
|
|
</affiliation>
|
|
<contrib>Latin translation</contrib>
|
|
</othercredit>
|
|
-->
|
|
</authorgroup>
|
|
|
|
<!--
|
|
|
|
According to GNU GPL, revision history is mandatory if you are
|
|
modifying/reusing someone else's document. If not, you can omit
|
|
it. Remember to remove the &manrevision; entity from the
|
|
revision entries other than the current revision.
|
|
|
|
The revision numbering system for GNOME manuals is as follows:
|
|
|
|
* the revision number consists of two components
|
|
* the first component of the revision number reflects the release version
|
|
of the GNOME desktop.
|
|
* the second component of the revision number is a decimal unit that is
|
|
incremented with each revision of the manual.
|
|
|
|
For example, if the GNOME desktop release is V2.x, the first
|
|
version of the manual that is written in that desktop time frame
|
|
is V2.0, the second version of the manual is V2.1, etc.
|
|
|
|
When the desktop release version changes to V3.x, the revision
|
|
number of the manual changes to V3.0, and so on.
|
|
-->
|
|
|
|
<revhistory>
|
|
<revision>
|
|
<revnumber>GRAMPS Manual V2.9</revnumber>
|
|
|
|
<date>November 2006</date>
|
|
|
|
<revdescription>
|
|
<para role="author">Alex Roitman
|
|
<email>shura@gramps-project.org</email></para>
|
|
|
|
<para role="publisher">GRAMPS Project</para>
|
|
</revdescription>
|
|
</revision>
|
|
|
|
<revision>
|
|
<revnumber>GRAMPS Manual V2.8</revnumber>
|
|
|
|
<date>July 2006</date>
|
|
|
|
<revdescription>
|
|
<para role="author">Alex Roitman
|
|
<email>shura@gramps-project.org</email></para>
|
|
|
|
<para role="publisher">GRAMPS Project</para>
|
|
</revdescription>
|
|
</revision>
|
|
|
|
<revision>
|
|
<revnumber>GRAMPS Manual V2.5</revnumber>
|
|
|
|
<date>February 2004</date>
|
|
|
|
<revdescription>
|
|
<para role="author">Alex Roitman
|
|
<email>shura@gramps-project.org</email></para>
|
|
|
|
<para role="publisher">GRAMPS Project</para>
|
|
</revdescription>
|
|
</revision>
|
|
|
|
<revision>
|
|
<revnumber>GRAMPS Manual V2.4</revnumber>
|
|
|
|
<date>December 2003</date>
|
|
|
|
<revdescription>
|
|
<para role="author">Alex Roitman
|
|
<email>shura@gramps-project.org</email></para>
|
|
|
|
<para role="publisher">GRAMPS Project</para>
|
|
</revdescription>
|
|
</revision>
|
|
|
|
<revision>
|
|
<revnumber>GRAMPS Manual V2.3</revnumber>
|
|
|
|
<date>September 2003</date>
|
|
|
|
<revdescription>
|
|
<para role="author">Alex Roitman
|
|
<email>shura@gramps-project.org</email></para>
|
|
|
|
<para role="publisher">GRAMPS Project</para>
|
|
</revdescription>
|
|
</revision>
|
|
|
|
<revision>
|
|
<revnumber>GRAMPS Manual V2.2</revnumber>
|
|
|
|
<date>July 2003</date>
|
|
|
|
<revdescription>
|
|
<para role="author">Alex Roitman
|
|
<email>shura@gramps-project.org</email></para>
|
|
|
|
<para role="author">Donald A. Peterson
|
|
<email>dpeterson@sigmaxi.org</email></para>
|
|
|
|
<para role="publisher">GRAMPS Project</para>
|
|
</revdescription>
|
|
</revision>
|
|
|
|
<revision>
|
|
<revnumber>GRAMPS Manual V2.1</revnumber>
|
|
|
|
<date>May 2003</date>
|
|
|
|
<revdescription>
|
|
<para role="author">Alex Roitman
|
|
<email>shura@gramps-project.org</email></para>
|
|
|
|
<para role="publisher">GRAMPS Project</para>
|
|
</revdescription>
|
|
</revision>
|
|
|
|
<revision>
|
|
<revnumber>GRAMPS Manual V2.0</revnumber>
|
|
|
|
<date>April 2003</date>
|
|
|
|
<revdescription>
|
|
<para role="author">Alex Roitman
|
|
<email>shura@gramps-project.org</email></para>
|
|
|
|
<para role="publisher">GRAMPS Project</para>
|
|
</revdescription>
|
|
</revision>
|
|
|
|
<revision>
|
|
<revnumber>GRAMPS User Manual V1.1</revnumber>
|
|
|
|
<date>2001</date>
|
|
|
|
<revdescription>
|
|
<para role="author">Donald N. Allingham
|
|
<email>don@gramps-project.org</email></para>
|
|
|
|
<para role="publisher">GRAMPS Project</para>
|
|
</revdescription>
|
|
</revision>
|
|
|
|
<revision>
|
|
<revnumber>gramps User Manual V1.0</revnumber>
|
|
|
|
<date>2001</date>
|
|
|
|
<revdescription>
|
|
<para role="author">Donald N. Allingham
|
|
<email>don@gramps-project.org</email></para>
|
|
|
|
<para role="publisher">GRAMPS Project</para>
|
|
</revdescription>
|
|
</revision>
|
|
</revhistory>
|
|
|
|
<releaseinfo>This manual describes version 2.2.0 of GRAMPS.</releaseinfo>
|
|
</bookinfo>
|
|
|
|
<preface id="gramps-preface">
|
|
<title>Preface</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>GRAMPS is a software package designed for genealogical research.
|
|
Although similar to other genealogical programs, GRAMPS offers some unique
|
|
and powerful features, which we'll discuss below.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>GRAMPS is an Open Source Software package, which means you are free
|
|
to make copies and distribute it to anyone you like. It's developed and
|
|
maintained by a worldwide team of volunteers whose goal is to make GRAMPS
|
|
powerful, yet easy to use.</para>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="why-gramps">
|
|
<title>Why use GRAMPS?</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Most genealogy programs allow you to enter information about your
|
|
ancestors and descendants. Typically, they can display family
|
|
relationships through charts, graphs, or reports. Some allow you to
|
|
include pictures or other media. Most let you include information about
|
|
people even if those people are not related to the primary family you
|
|
happen to be researching. And they may include features that let you
|
|
exchange data with other programs and print different types of
|
|
reports.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>GRAMPS has all these capabilities and more. Notably, it allows you
|
|
to integrate bits and pieces of data as they arise from your research
|
|
and to put them in one place -- your computer. You can then use your
|
|
computer to manipulate, correlate, and analyze your data, rather than
|
|
messing with reams of paper.</para>
|
|
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="typography">
|
|
<title>Typographical conventions</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>In this book, some words are marked with special typography:
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<simpara><application>Applications</application></simpara>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<simpara><command>Commands</command> you type at the command
|
|
line</simpara>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<simpara><filename>Filenames</filename></simpara>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<simpara><replaceable>Replaceable text</replaceable></simpara>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<simpara><guilabel>Labels</guilabel> for buttons and other
|
|
portions of the graphical interface</simpara>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<simpara>Menu selections look like this: <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Menu</guimenu>
|
|
<guisubmenu>Submenu</guisubmenu>
|
|
<guimenuitem>Menu Item</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice></simpara>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<simpara><guibutton>Buttons</guibutton> you can click</simpara>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<simpara><userinput>Anything you type in</userinput></simpara>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist></para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The manual also provides assorted bits of additional information
|
|
in tips and notes, as follows. <tip id="example-tip">
|
|
<title>Example Tip</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Tips and bits of extra information will look like this.</para>
|
|
</tip> <note id="example-note">
|
|
<title>Example Note</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Notes will look like this.</para>
|
|
</note></para>
|
|
|
|
<para>Finally, there are warnings, notifying you where you should be
|
|
careful: <warning id="example-warning">
|
|
<title>Example Warning</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>This is what a warning looks like. If there's a chance you'll
|
|
run into trouble, you will be warned beforehand.</para>
|
|
</warning></para>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
</preface>
|
|
|
|
<chapter id="gramps-getting-started">
|
|
<title>Getting Started</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>In this chapter, we'll begin with the basics. We'll show you how to
|
|
start GRAMPS and how to get help when you need it.</para>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="gramps-start">
|
|
<title>To Start GRAMPS</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>You can start GRAMPS in the following ways:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>From the <guimenu>Applications</guimenu> menu</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Select GRAMPS from the list of programs displayed in your
|
|
computer's Applications menu. (The location and appearance of this
|
|
menu vary slightly from one distribution of Linux to another. On
|
|
the default GNOME desktop, you'll find GRAMPS in the <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Applications</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guisubmenu>Other</guisubmenu>
|
|
</menuchoice> menu.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>From the command line</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>If you're adept with Linux and like to work from the command
|
|
line, you can start GRAMPS by calling up a terminal window, typing
|
|
<command>gramps</command>, and then pressing
|
|
<keycap>Enter</keycap>.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>If you would like GRAMPS to open a specific database or to
|
|
import a specific file on startup, you can supply the filename as
|
|
a command line argument:</para>
|
|
|
|
<para><filename>gramps filename.grdb</filename></para>
|
|
|
|
<para>where <filename>filename.grdb</filename> is the name of the
|
|
file you want to open. The command line provides many more ways to
|
|
start GRAMPS and perform different tasks.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="choose-db-start">
|
|
<title>Choosing a database</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>If GRAMPS is started without a database selected, the initial
|
|
screen will have little functionality. Most operations will not be
|
|
available. To load a database, select either <guibutton>New</guibutton>
|
|
to create a new database, or <guibutton>Open</guibutton> to open an
|
|
existing database. GRAMPS keeps track of your recently opened databases,
|
|
and these can be selected by clicking on the arrow next to the
|
|
<guibutton>Open</guibutton> button and choosing from the drop down
|
|
menu.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="first-open">
|
|
<title>Initial Window</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/first-open.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Initial Window.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="get-help">
|
|
<title>Obtaining Help</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>GRAMPS has a <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Help</guimenu>
|
|
</menuchoice> menu that you can consult at any time. It includes the
|
|
following items:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>User manual</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>An electronic version of the manual that you can access
|
|
while you work in GRAMPS.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>FAQ</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>A list of Frequently Asked Questions about GRAMPS.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Tip of the day</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Displays the "Tip of the day" dialog.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Plugin status</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Use this item to display the status of any plugins you may
|
|
have added.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>GRAMPS home page</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This item opens your web browser and connects to the GRAMPS' project
|
|
web site.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>GRAMPS mailing lists</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This item opens your web browser to the GRAMPS mailing list page. At
|
|
this page, you can browse the mailing list archives or join the mailing list</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Report a bug</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Choose this item to file a bug report in our bug tracking
|
|
system. (Remember, GRAMPS is a living project. We want to know
|
|
about any problems you encounter so we can work to solve them for
|
|
everyone's benefit.)</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>About</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This item displays a dialog with general information about
|
|
the GRAMPS version you are running.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
</chapter>
|
|
|
|
<chapter id="gramps-mainwin">
|
|
<title>Main Window</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>When you open a database (either existing or new), the following
|
|
window is displayed:</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="mainwin-fig" pgwide="1">
|
|
<title>GRAMPS Main Window</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/mainwin.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>The main GRAMPS window contains the following elements:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Menubar</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The menubar is located at the very top of the window (right
|
|
below the window title) and provides access to all the features of
|
|
GRAMPS.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Toolbar</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The toolbar is located right below the menubar. It gives you
|
|
access to the most frequently used functions of GRAMPS. You can set
|
|
options that control how it appears by going to <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guisubmenu>Preferences</guisubmenu>
|
|
</menuchoice>. You can also hide it entirely by going to
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>View</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guisubmenu>Toolbar</guisubmenu>
|
|
</menuchoice>.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Progress Bar</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The Progress Bar is located in the lower left corner of the
|
|
GRAMPS window. It displays the progress of time consuming
|
|
operations, such as opening and saving large databases, importing
|
|
and exporting to other formats, generating web sites, etc. When you
|
|
are not doing these types of operations, the Progress Bar is
|
|
not shown.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Status Bar</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The Status Bar is located to the right of the Progress Bar, on
|
|
the very bottom of the GRAMPS window. It displays information about
|
|
current GRAMPS activity and contextual information about the
|
|
selected items. </para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Display area</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The largest area in the center of the GRAMPS window is the
|
|
display area. What it displays depends on the currently selected
|
|
View. We'll discuss Views in detail below.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="gramps-views">
|
|
<title>Views</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Genealogical information is very broad and can be extremely
|
|
detailed. Displaying it poses a challenge that GRAMPS takes on by
|
|
dividing and organizing the information into a series of Views. Each
|
|
View displays a portion of the total information, selected according to
|
|
a particular category. This will become clearer as we explore the
|
|
different Views, listed below:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>People View</term>
|
|
<listitem><para>Displays the list of people in the database</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Relationships View</term>
|
|
<listitem><para>Shows the relationships between the Active Person and other
|
|
people. This includes parents, spouses, and children</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Family List View</term>
|
|
<listitem><para>Shows the list of families in the database</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Pedigree View</term>
|
|
<listitem><para>Displays a graphical ancestor tree for the selected
|
|
person</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Events View</term>
|
|
<listitem><para>Displays the list of events in the database</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Sources View</term>
|
|
<listitem><para>Displays the list of sources in the database</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Places View</term>
|
|
<listitem><para>Displays the list of places in the database</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Media View</term>
|
|
<listitem><para>Displays the list of media objects in the database</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Repositories View</term>
|
|
<listitem><para>Displays the list of repositories in the database.</para></listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<para>Before we launch into a description of each View, let's first
|
|
explain how to switch between Views.</para>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="view-modes">
|
|
<title>Switching Views and Viewing Modes</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>As mentioned above there are nine different Views. In addition,
|
|
there are two different Viewing Modes. You can tell at a glance which
|
|
Viewing Mode you are in: If you see icons listed vertically in a
|
|
sidebar at the left of the window, you are in the Sidebar Viewing
|
|
Mode. If instead you see a series of "notebook tabs" (labeled People,
|
|
Relationships, Family List, Pedigree, Events, Sources, Places, Media
|
|
and Repositories) that run horizontally across the window, then you
|
|
are in the Tabbed Viewing Mode. You can switch from one Viewing Mode
|
|
to another by selecting <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>View</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Sidebar</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice> from the Sidebar menu item.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>If you're in the Sidebar Viewing Mode, you can select the View
|
|
you want by clicking one of the sidebar icons.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="side-nofilt-fig">
|
|
<title>Sidebar Viewing Mode</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/mainwin.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows sidebar viewing mode.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>If you're in the Tabbed Viewing Mode, you can select the View
|
|
you want by clicking the corresponding notebook tab.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="noside-nofilt-fig">
|
|
<title>Tabbed Viewing Mode</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/noside-nofilt.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows tabbed viewing mode.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="people-view">
|
|
<title>People View</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
The People View lists the people stored in the database.
|
|
You'll note that people are grouped according to their family
|
|
names. To the left of each family name is typically either an
|
|
arrow or some other type of indicator. Clicking it once will
|
|
reveal the entire list of people sharing that name. Clicking
|
|
the indicator again will "roll up" the list and show
|
|
only the family name.
|
|
|
|
</para>
|
|
<para>
|
|
|
|
By default, the People View, displays the several columns of information
|
|
about each person. You can add or remove columns to and
|
|
from the display by calling up the <guilabel>Column Editor</guilabel>
|
|
dialog (
|
|
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
|
|
<guimenuitem>Column Editor</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>)
|
|
|
|
and checking or unchecking the boxes listed. You can
|
|
also change the position of a column in People View by clicking and
|
|
dragging it to a new position in the Editor. Once you have made the
|
|
changes you want, click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to exit the Editor
|
|
and see your changes in the People View.</para>
|
|
|
|
<note id="columns-tip">
|
|
<title>Column Editor</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>The Column Editor is available in all Views and works the same
|
|
way in each.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="column-editor-fig">
|
|
<title>Column Editor Dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/column-editor.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows column editor dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<sect3 id="filters">
|
|
<title>Filters</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Genealogical databases can contain information on many people,
|
|
families, places, and objects. It's therefore possible for a View to
|
|
contain a long list of data that's difficult to work with. GRAMPS
|
|
gives you two different means for controlling this condition by
|
|
allowing you to filter a list to a more manageable size. These
|
|
methods are Search and Filtering. A search will search the text
|
|
displayed in list, whereas filters display people whose data match
|
|
the criteria of the filter.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>Search is a simple but fast method of searching the columns
|
|
displayed on the screen. Typing the characters into the Search box
|
|
and clicking the Find button will display only lines that match the
|
|
text.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>Alternatively, you can enable the Filter sidebar, which will
|
|
be displayed on the right hand side of the display. When the filter
|
|
sidebar is displayed, the Search bar is not displayed. The Filter
|
|
side bar allows you to interactively build a set of filter rules
|
|
that can be applied to the display. The filter is applied based on
|
|
the rules and the data, not on the screen display.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip id="search-tip">
|
|
<title>Searching vs. Filtering</title>
|
|
<para>Searching only searches for exact text matches. If the date
|
|
displayed is "Jan 1, 2000", a search of "1/1/2000"
|
|
will fail, but a filter of "1/1/2000" will match.</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="side-filt-fig">
|
|
<title>Filter Controls Displayed</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/side-filt.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows filter controls.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>When GRAMPS opens a database, no filtering is in effect. In
|
|
People View, for example, all people in the database are listed by
|
|
default.</para>
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="relationships-view">
|
|
<title>Relationships View</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>The Relationships View displays all the relationships of the
|
|
Active Person (the selected person). Specifically, it shows
|
|
his or her parents, siblings, spouses, and children.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The Relationships View is designed to allow for quick
|
|
navigation. You can quickly change the Active Person simply by
|
|
clicking the name of any person listed on the page. Each name is
|
|
actually a hypertext link, similar to a web page.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="family-fig">
|
|
<title>Relationships View</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/family.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Relationships View.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>The Relationships View displays the following sections:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Active Person</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>At the top of the screen, name, ID, birth, and death
|
|
information of the Active Person is displayed. If a photo of the
|
|
person is available, it is shown on the right hand side. Next to
|
|
the person's name is a symbol indicating gender, and an Edit
|
|
button. Clicking the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button will
|
|
allow you to edit all of the person's individual information in
|
|
an Edit Person dialog.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Parents</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The next section, the Parents section, displays the families
|
|
in which the person is a child. Since it is possible for a person to
|
|
have multiple sets of parents, it is possible to have several Parents
|
|
sections. </para>
|
|
|
|
<para>You can control how much information is displayed by using the
|
|
<guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. The view menu allows you to show
|
|
or hide details (the birth and death information) and to show or
|
|
hide siblings. Next to each person listed is an
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button, which will allow you to edit
|
|
all the details of that particular person.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>You may add a new set of parents by either
|
|
selecting the <guibutton>Add Parents</guibutton> or the
|
|
<guibutton>Share Parents</guibutton>. The
|
|
<guibutton>Add Parents</guibutton> button will create a
|
|
new family with the Active Person listed as a child. The
|
|
<guibutton>Share Parents</guibutton> button will allow
|
|
you to choose from a list of existing families, and then
|
|
add the person as a child to that family.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>You may edit an existing parents by selecting the
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button next to the
|
|
parents. If you select the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton>
|
|
next to a set of parents, then the Active Person will be
|
|
removed as a child from the parents. This button does
|
|
not delete the parents' relationship.</para>
|
|
|
|
<warning>
|
|
<para>If you are not careful, it is possible to create
|
|
multiple families with the same parents. This is rarely what
|
|
the user wants to do. If you attempt to add a new family that
|
|
has the same parents as an existing family, GRAMPS will issue
|
|
a warning dialog. If you get this dialog, you should probably
|
|
Cancel the edit, and then use the
|
|
<guibutton>Select</guibutton> button to select the existing
|
|
family.</para>
|
|
</warning>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Family</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Similar to the Parents section is the Family section,
|
|
which displays families where the Active Person is a parent. Because it
|
|
is possible to have multiple familes, it is possible to have
|
|
multiple Family sections. Each family section displays the
|
|
spouse and any children.</para>
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>We use the term <emphasis>spouse</emphasis> for sake of
|
|
simplicity. However, please note that
|
|
<emphasis>spouse</emphasis> may in fact be a domestic partner,
|
|
a partner in a civil union, or various other similar
|
|
relationships between two people. <emphasis>Spouse</emphasis>
|
|
relationships are not required to be only between a male and
|
|
female.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<para>You may add a family by selecting the
|
|
<guibutton>Add Spouse</guibutton> in the toolbar. This
|
|
will create a new family with the Active Person listed
|
|
as a father or mother.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>Selecting the Edit button next to the spouse will
|
|
allow you to edit the displayed family. Clicking the
|
|
Delete button will remove the person from the displayed
|
|
family.</para>
|
|
|
|
<warning>
|
|
<para>Removing a person from a family does not delete the
|
|
family. The person is removed as the father or mother, and any
|
|
other relationships in the family continue to exist.</para>
|
|
</warning>
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>We use the terms <emphasis>father</emphasis> and
|
|
<emphasis>mother</emphasis> for the sake of simplicity. Even
|
|
if there are no children in a family, the
|
|
<emphasis>father</emphasis> and <emphasis>mother</emphasis>
|
|
terminology is still used. In the case of male/male or
|
|
female/female relationships, the <emphasis>father</emphasis>
|
|
and <emphasis>mother</emphasis> labels should be considered to
|
|
be convenience labels.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<para>You can reorder the parents and spouses by selecting the
|
|
<guibutton>Reorder</guibutton>. This option will only be enabled
|
|
if more than one set of parents or more than one set of spouses
|
|
exists for the Active Person. Selecting this button will display
|
|
a dialog that will allow you to reorder the families.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="reorder-dialog">
|
|
<title>Relationship Reordering Window</title>
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/reorder.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Relationship Reordering Window.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="family-list-view">
|
|
<title>Family List View</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>The Family List View displays a list of all families in the
|
|
database. From this view, you may add, edit, or delete families. The
|
|
default display lists the ID, Father, Mother, and Relationship.
|
|
Children cannot be displayed on the screen in this view.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="family-list">
|
|
<title>Family List View</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/family-list.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Family List View.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<warning>
|
|
<para>Unlike the Relationships View, clicking the Remove button in
|
|
this view will remove the family from the database. All people will
|
|
remain, but all relationships between the people in the family will
|
|
be removed.</para>
|
|
</warning>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="pedigree-view">
|
|
<title>Pedigree View</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>The Pedigree View displays a family tree of the Active Person's
|
|
ancestors. The Pedigree View shows up to five generations, depending
|
|
on the size of the window. Each person is indicated by a box labeled
|
|
with his or her name, birth and death information, and optionally an
|
|
image if available. Two lines branch from each box. The top one shows
|
|
the person's father and the bottom one the mother. Solid lines
|
|
represent birth relations, while dashed lines represent non-birth
|
|
relations such as adoption, step-parenthood, guardianship, etc.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="pedigree-fig">
|
|
<title>Pedigree View</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/pedigree.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Pedigree View.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>To the left of the Active Person is a left arrow button. If the
|
|
Active Person has children, clicking this button expands a list of the
|
|
Active Person's children. Selecting one of the children makes that
|
|
child the Active Person.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The appearance of the children's names in the menu
|
|
differentiates the <emphasis>dead ends</emphasis> of the tree from the
|
|
continuing branches. Children who have children themselves appear in
|
|
the menu in the boldface and italic type, while children without
|
|
children (<emphasis>dead ends</emphasis>) appear in a regular font. If
|
|
the Active Person has only one child, no menu will be displayed (since
|
|
there is only one choice) and the child will become the Active Person
|
|
when the arrow button is clicked.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="pedigree-child-cut-fig">
|
|
<title>Children Menu</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/pedigree-child-cut.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Children Menu in Pedigree View.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>The right-hand side of the window shows two right arrow buttons.
|
|
When the top button is clicked, the Father of the Active Person
|
|
becomes the Active Person. When the bottom button is clicked, the Mother
|
|
of the Active Person becomes the Active Person.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="pedigree-siblings-cut-fig">
|
|
<title>Personal Context Menu</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/pedigree-siblings-cut.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Context Menu in Pedigree View.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>Right-clicking on any person's box in the Pedigree View will
|
|
bring up the "context menu". Among other useful items, the context
|
|
menu has sub-menus listing <guilabel>Spouses</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>Siblings</guilabel>, <guilabel>Children</guilabel>, and
|
|
<guilabel>Parents</guilabel> of that person. "Greyed-out" sub-menus
|
|
indicate the absence of the data in the appropriate category.
|
|
Similar to the children menu above, Childrens' and Parents' menus
|
|
distinguish continuing lines from dead ends.</para>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="event-view">
|
|
<title>Events View</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>New in version 2.2 is the inclusion of an Events View. Events
|
|
can be shared between multiple people and multiple families.
|
|
The Events View lists the all the events recorded in the database. The
|
|
default view displays the <guilabel>Description</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>ID</guilabel>, <guilabel>Type</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>Date</guilabel>, <guilabel>Place</guilabel> and
|
|
<guilabel>Cause</guilabel> of the event.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="events-fig">
|
|
<title>Events View</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/events.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Events View.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<warning>
|
|
<para>Because events can be shared, you should take the extra time
|
|
to give each event a unique and meaningful description. This will
|
|
help you find the correct event if you decide to share
|
|
events.</para>
|
|
</warning>
|
|
|
|
<para>The list of Events can be sorted in the usual manner, by
|
|
clicking on the column heading. Clicking once sorts in ascending order,
|
|
clicking again sorts in descending order. The <guilabel>Column
|
|
Editor</guilabel> dialog can be used to add, remove and rearrange the
|
|
displayed columns.</para>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="sources-view">
|
|
<title>Sources View</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Sources View lists the sources of certain information stored in
|
|
the database. These can include various documents (birth, death, and
|
|
marriage certificates, etc.), books, films, journals, private diaries,
|
|
- nearly anything that can provide genealogical evidence. GRAMPS gives
|
|
you the option to provide a source for each event you record (births,
|
|
deaths, marriages, etc.). The Sources View lists the
|
|
<guilabel>Title</guilabel>, <guilabel>ID</guilabel>, and
|
|
<guilabel>Author</guilabel> of the source, as well as any
|
|
<guilabel>Publication</guilabel> information that may be associated
|
|
with it.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The list of Sources can be sorted by clicking on a
|
|
column heading. Clicking once sorts in ascending order,
|
|
clicking again sorts in descending order. The <guilabel>Column
|
|
Editor</guilabel> dialog can be used to add, remove and
|
|
rearrange the displayed columns.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="sources-fig">
|
|
<title>Sources View</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/sources.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Sources View.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="places-view">
|
|
<title>Places View</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>The Places View lists the geographical places in which the
|
|
events of the database took place. These could be places of birth,
|
|
death, and marriages of people, as well as their home, employment,
|
|
education addresses, or any other conceivable reference to the
|
|
geographical location. The Places View lists the places'
|
|
<guilabel>Name</guilabel>, <guilabel>ID</guilabel>, <guilabel>Church
|
|
Parish</guilabel>, <guilabel>City</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>County</guilabel>, <guilabel>State</guilabel>, and
|
|
<guilabel>Country</guilabel>. All of these columns can be used
|
|
for sorting by clicking on a column heading. Clicking once
|
|
sorts in ascending order, clicking again sorts in descending
|
|
order. The <guilabel>Column Editor</guilabel> dialog may be
|
|
used to add, remove and rearrange the displayed
|
|
columns.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>If a place has been highlighted, you may select the
|
|
<guibutton>Google Maps</guibutton> button to attempt to display the
|
|
place in a web browser. Your default web browser should open,
|
|
attempting to use either the longitude and lattitude coordinates or
|
|
the place name to display the location using the Google Maps web site.
|
|
This feature is limited, and may not always produce the results you
|
|
desire.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="places-fig">
|
|
<title>Places View</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/places.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Places View.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="media-view">
|
|
<title>Media View</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>The Media View is a list of Media Objects used in the database.
|
|
Media Objects are any files that relate somehow to the stored
|
|
genealogical data. Technically, any file can be stored as a Media
|
|
Object. Most frequently, these are images, audio files, animation
|
|
files, etc. The list box on the bottom lists the
|
|
<guilabel>Name</guilabel>, <guilabel>ID</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>Type</guilabel>, and <guilabel>Path</guilabel> of the Media
|
|
Object. The <guilabel>Column Editor</guilabel> dialog may be used to
|
|
rearrange the displayed columns, which obey usual sorting rules. The
|
|
top part of the GRAMPS window shows a preview (if available) and
|
|
information about the Media Object.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="media-fig">
|
|
<title>Media View</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/media.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Media View.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="repository-view">
|
|
<title>Repositories View</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Version 2.2 adds support for Repositories. A repository can be
|
|
thought of as a collection of sources. Each source in the database can
|
|
reference a repository (such as a library) in which it belongs. The
|
|
functionality of the Repositories View is similar to the other
|
|
views.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="repository-fig">
|
|
<title>Repositories View</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/repository.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Repositories View.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
</chapter>
|
|
|
|
<chapter id="gramps-usage">
|
|
<title>Usage</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Now we turn to a detailed exploration of the day-to-day use of
|
|
GRAMPS. First, we should point out that GRAMPS often offers more than one
|
|
way to do the same task. We'll try to point out some of these alternatives
|
|
where appropriate.</para>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="new-db">
|
|
<title>Starting a New Database</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>To start a new database, choose <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>New</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice> or select the <guibutton>New</guibutton> button from the
|
|
toolbar. You will then be asked to give the new database a name.</para>
|
|
|
|
<note id="new-db-notdir-note">
|
|
<title>GRAMPS databases</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>GRAMPS stores your data in a Berkeley database, sometimes known
|
|
as BSDDB. These files have ".grdb" as their default extension. The
|
|
extension is automatically added to your filename.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="open-db">
|
|
<title>Opening a Database</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>To open a database, either choose <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Open</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice> or click the <guibutton>Open</guibutton> button on the
|
|
Toolbar. The <guilabel>Open database</guilabel> dialog will appear and
|
|
you'll see a list of files. If you don't see the file you're looking
|
|
for, make sure the All files filter is selected. (This dialog has a
|
|
"filetype" filter, meaning it may only be showing files that have a
|
|
certain extension.)</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>To open a recently accessed database, choose either <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Open Recent</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice> or the down arrow next to the
|
|
<guibutton>Open</guibutton> button and select the filename from the
|
|
list.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>If you do not have "write permissions" for the selected database,
|
|
it will be opened in a Read Only mode. In this mode, the data may be
|
|
viewed, but no changes will be made to the database. To indicate this
|
|
mode, the title of the main window will be appended with <guilabel>(Read
|
|
Only)</guilabel> text.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>GRAMPS allows you to open certain databases that have not been
|
|
saved in GRAMPS' own file format. These include XML and GEDCOM
|
|
databases. But you should be aware that if the XML or GEDCOM database is
|
|
relatively large, you may encounter some performance problems. These can
|
|
be avoided by creating a new GRAMPS database and importing your
|
|
XML/GEDCOM data into it.</para>
|
|
|
|
<note id="open-db-note2">
|
|
<title>Opening XML and GEDCOM databases</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>XML and GEDCOM databases require all data to be held in memory.
|
|
GRAMPS' native grdb format does not. Thus, a database with a grdb
|
|
format can access data quicker and more efficiently.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<warning id="open-db-warn">
|
|
<title>GEDCOM Editing</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Please keep in mind that some information in a GEDCOM file may
|
|
be lost during import into GRAMPS. Simply opening and viewing the file
|
|
will not change it. However, if any changes were made and they were
|
|
not abandoned upon exit, exiting GRAMPS will save the data, with
|
|
possible data loss.</para>
|
|
</warning>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="save-db">
|
|
<title>Saving Changes to Your Database</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>GRAMPS saves your changes as soon as you apply them. This means,
|
|
for example, that any time you click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> when
|
|
using GRAMPS, your changes are immediately recorded and saved. There is
|
|
no separate "save" command (although there is a "save as" command that
|
|
we'll discuss later.)</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>You can undo changes you've made by selecting <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Undo</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>. If you select this command repeatedly, your most recent
|
|
changes will be undone one at a time. To roll back multple commands at a
|
|
time, you can using the <guilabel>Undo History</guilabel> dialog
|
|
available from the <guilabel>Edit</guilabel> menu.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>If you want to return your database to the way it was when you
|
|
opened it, select <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Abandon changes and quit</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>. (This is just like quitting without saving in other
|
|
programs.)</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>If you would like to save your database under a different
|
|
name, you can do so by choosing <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Save as...</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice> and specifying the name (and, optionally, the
|
|
format) of your new database. Note that <guimenuitem>Save
|
|
as</guimenuitem> will allow you to continue editing the newly
|
|
saved database. If this is not what you want to do, you may wish
|
|
to use the <guimenuitem>Export</guimenuitem> command instead.</para>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="import-data">
|
|
<title>Importing Data</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Importing allows you to bring data from other genealogy programs
|
|
into a GRAMPS database. Currently, GRAMPS can import data from the
|
|
following formats:</para>
|
|
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Another GRAMPS database (having the
|
|
<filename>grdb</filename> file extension),</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>GEDCOM</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>GRAMPS XML</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>GRAMPS package</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>GeneWeb</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
|
|
<note id="import-note">
|
|
<title>Importing vs. opening</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Please recognize that importing a database is different from
|
|
opening a database. When you import, you are actually bringing data
|
|
from one database into a GRAMPS database. When you open a file, you
|
|
are editing your original file.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<para>To import data, select <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guisubmenu>Import</guisubmenu>
|
|
</menuchoice>. The <guilabel>Import database</guilabel> dialog will
|
|
open, asking you to specify the file you wish to import.</para>
|
|
|
|
<warning id="import-dataloss">
|
|
<title>Data loss with some formats</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>It is important to note that the importing process is not
|
|
perfect for GEDCOM and GeneWeb databases. There is a chance that some
|
|
of the data in these databases will not be imported into
|
|
GRAMPS.</para>
|
|
</warning>
|
|
|
|
<para>The GRAMPS database (grdb), GRAMPS XML, and GRAMPS package are all
|
|
native GRAMPS formats. There is no risk of information loss when import
|
|
or exporting to these formats.</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>GRAMPS database (grdb)</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The native GRAMPS database format is a specific form of
|
|
Berkeley database (BSDDB) with a special structure of data tables.
|
|
This format is binary and architecture-dependent. It is very quick
|
|
and efficient, but not generally portable across computers with
|
|
different binary architecture (e.g. i386 vs alpha).</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>GRAMPS XML</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The GRAMPS XML file was the default format for older
|
|
versions of GRAMPS. Unlike the grdb format, it is architecture
|
|
independent and human-readable. The database may also have
|
|
references to non-local (external) media objects, therefore it is
|
|
not guaranteed to be completely portable. The GRAMPS XML database
|
|
is created by saving ( <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Save As...</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice> ) or exporting ( <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Export...</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice> ) data in that format</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>GRAMPS package</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The GRAMPS package is a compressed archive containing the
|
|
GRAMPS XML file and all media objects (images, sound files, etc.)
|
|
to which the database refers. Because it contains all the media
|
|
objects, this format is completely portable. The GRAMPS package is
|
|
created by exporting ( <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Export...</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice> ) data in that format.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<para>If you import information from another GRAMPS database or GRAMPS
|
|
XML database, you will see the progress of the operation in the progress
|
|
bar of GRAMPS' main window.</para>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="export-data">
|
|
<title>Exporting Data</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Exporting allows you to share any portion of your GRAMPS database
|
|
with other researchers as well as to enable you to transfer your data to
|
|
another computer. Currently, GRAMPS can export data to the following
|
|
formats: GRAMPS database (grdb), GRAMPS XML, GEDCOM, GRAMPS package, Web
|
|
Family Tree, and GeneWeb.</para>
|
|
|
|
<note id="export-note">
|
|
<title>Export is saving a copy</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>When you export, you are saving a copy of the currently opened
|
|
database. Exporting creates another file with a copy of your data.
|
|
Note that the database that remains opened in your GRAMPS window is
|
|
NOT the file saved by your export. Additional editing of the currently
|
|
opened database will not alter the copy produced by the export.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<para>To export data, choose <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Export</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>. This will bring up the <guilabel>Export</guilabel>
|
|
assistant. Its pages will guide you through the format selection (see
|
|
<xref linkend="export-druid-fig" />), file selection, and format
|
|
specific export options (see <xref linkend="gedcom-export-fig" />).
|
|
After a final confirmation page, the export will be performed according
|
|
to the choices you have made. At any time, you can click the
|
|
<guibutton>Back</guibutton> and revise any selection, and then go
|
|
forward to redo the export.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="export-druid-fig">
|
|
<title>Export assistant: format selection</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/export-druid.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows format selection page of an Export
|
|
assistant</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="export-gedcom">
|
|
<title>Exporting into the GEDCOM format</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>GRAMPS allows you to export a database into the common GEDCOM
|
|
format. It provides options that allow you to fine tune your export
|
|
(see <xref linkend="gedcom-export-fig" />).</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Encoding</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Since different languages use different characters, it is
|
|
important to tell a GEDCOM file what character set is used. The
|
|
two formats traditionally accepted are ASCII and ANSEL. Since
|
|
all ASCII characters are valid ANSEL characters, GRAMPS does not
|
|
provide an option for ASCII.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>Because ANSEL is not commonly used, some genealogy
|
|
programs will accept ANSI (more commonly know as ISO-8859-1) and
|
|
Unicode character sets. Only select ANSI or Unicode if you know
|
|
any program that attempts to read the GEDCOM file will
|
|
understand these character sets.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Filter</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The filter allows you to export a limited amount of data,
|
|
based on the criteria you select.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Target</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>While GEDCOM is a standard, not every program implements
|
|
it in the same way. This can lead to data loss. GRAMPS can
|
|
reduce the data loss in some cases. You can tell GRAMPS what
|
|
program is the target, and GRAMPS will customize the exported
|
|
file for that program. If your program is not listed, choose the
|
|
"GEDCOM 5.5 Standard".</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Copyright</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Allows you to select a statement to describe your
|
|
Copyright claim.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Do not include records marked private</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Check this box to prevent private records from being
|
|
included in the exported file.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Restrict data on living people</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Check this box to limit the information exported for
|
|
living people. This means that all information concerning their
|
|
birth, death, addresses, significant events, etc., will be
|
|
omitted in the exported GEDCOM file. If you choose this option,
|
|
you will be given additional options to limit further the data
|
|
on living people. For example, you can choose to substitute the
|
|
word "Living" for the first name; you can exclude notes; and you
|
|
can exclude sources for living people.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>Sometimes, it is not always obvious from the data if
|
|
someone is actually alive. GRAMPS uses an advanced algorithm to
|
|
try to determine if a person could still be alive. Remember,
|
|
GRAMPS is making its best guess, and it may not always be able
|
|
to guess correctly all the time. Please double check your
|
|
data.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Reference images from path</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Check this box to tell GRAMPS to use the specific path for
|
|
your images when writing image references in GEDCOM.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>This option allows specify where your image files are
|
|
located. This is useful when you are transfering your GEDCOM
|
|
file from one computer to another. It tells the program that is
|
|
importing the data where your images are.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="gedcom-export-fig">
|
|
<title>Export assistant: GEDCOM options</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/gedcom-export.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows GEDCOM options page of an Export druid</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="export-gramps-formats">
|
|
<title>Export into GRAMPS formats</title>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>GRAMPS database (grdb) export</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Exporting to the GRAMPS native format will simply make a
|
|
copy of your data under another name. Exporting to this format
|
|
can also be useful if you have directly opened an XML or GEDCOM
|
|
file and would like to save it as the grdb file.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>GRAMPS XML database export</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Exporting into GRAMPS XML format will produce a database
|
|
compatible with the previous versions of GRAMPS. As XML is a
|
|
text-based human-readable format, you may also use it to take a
|
|
look at your data.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>GRAMPS package export</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Exporting to the GRAMPS package format will create a
|
|
compressed file that contains the database and copies of all
|
|
associated media files. This is useful if you want to move your
|
|
database to another computer or to share it with someone.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Export to CD</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Exporting to CD will prepare your database and copies of
|
|
all media object files for recording onto a CD. To actually burn
|
|
the CD, you will need to go to the GNOME
|
|
<guilabel>burn:///</guilabel> location, which can be accessed by
|
|
navigating through Nautilus: After exporting to CD, select
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Go</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guisubmenu>CD Creator</guisubmenu>
|
|
</menuchoice> in the Nautilus menu. Your database directory
|
|
will show up. To burn it to the CD, click the CD icon on the
|
|
Nautilus toolbar, or select <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>File</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guisubmenu>Write to CD</guisubmenu>
|
|
</menuchoice> in the Nautilus menu.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<para>If a media file is not found during export, you will see the
|
|
same <guilabel>Missing Media</guilabel> dialog you encounter with
|
|
GEDCOM export.</para>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="export-other-formats">
|
|
<title>Export into other formats</title>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Web Family Tree</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Exporting to Web Family Tree will create a text file that
|
|
can be used by the Web Family Tree program. Export options
|
|
include filter selection and the ability to limit data on living
|
|
people to that of their family ties.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>GeneWeb</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Exporting to GeneWeb will save a copy of your data into a
|
|
popular web genealogy format. To find out more about GeneWeb and
|
|
its format, visit <ulink type="http"
|
|
url="http://cristal.inria.fr/~ddr/GeneWeb/en/">http://cristal.inria.fr/~ddr/GeneWeb/en/</ulink>.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>vCalendar and vCard</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Exporting to vCalendar or vCard will save information in a
|
|
format used in many calendaring and addressbook applications,
|
|
sometimes called PIM for Personal Information Manager.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="gramps-edit-quick">
|
|
<title>Entering and Editing Data: Quick Start Overview</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>This section is designed to give you the basic knowledge necessary
|
|
to start putting your genealogical information into GRAMPS. It will
|
|
explain how to enter people into the database and how to specify their
|
|
family relationships. (A more detailed explanation will follow in the
|
|
section entitled <xref linkend="gramps-edit-complete" />.)</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>First, let's identify the types of information you can enter into
|
|
your GRAMPS database. These include:</para>
|
|
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Personal information about an individual (names, addresses,
|
|
birth and death dates, etc.)</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Information about an individual's relationships (marriages,
|
|
divorces, civil unions, etc.)</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Information about an individual's parents and children</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Sources that document your research</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
|
|
<note id="keybind">
|
|
<title>Keybindings</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>In addition to interacting with GRAMPS through menu items and
|
|
buttons, you can use its extensive set of "keybindings." For more
|
|
information, see <xref linkend="append-keybind" />.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<para>Now let's take a quick look at how you can enter and edit these
|
|
various types of information.</para>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-add-pers">
|
|
<title>To Add or Edit a Person</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>There are multiple ways to add a person to the database. We will
|
|
cover some of them as we proceed. The simplest way to enter a person
|
|
to add them from the People View. While you are in the People View
|
|
(<xref linkend="side-nofilt-fig" />), click the
|
|
<guibutton>Add</guibutton> on the toolbar. Enter any data you know
|
|
about this person into the <guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel> dialog
|
|
(see <xref linkend="edit-pers-fig" /> for details).</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>To edit information about a person already present in the
|
|
database, select the person from the People View and click the
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button on the toolbar.</para>
|
|
|
|
<note id="person-menu">
|
|
<title>Alternate ways of adding or editing a person from the People
|
|
View</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>You can also use <guilabel>Add...</guilabel> and
|
|
<guilabel>Edit...</guilabel> menu items available under
|
|
<guimenu>Edit</guimenu>. Or you can right-click on the person and
|
|
select <guilabel>Add...</guilabel> or <guilabel>Edit...</guilabel>
|
|
from the context menu that pops up.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<para>People can also be added to the database in the Relationships
|
|
View, Edit Family dialog, and other places where it makes
|
|
sense.</para>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-spec-rel">
|
|
<title>To Specify a Relationship</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>There are two primary ways to specify relationships between
|
|
people - using the Relationships View and using the Edit Family dialog
|
|
from the Family List View. The Family List is usually used to build
|
|
all the relationships within a single family at a time. The
|
|
Relationships View is usually used to build multiple relationships to
|
|
a single person.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>To specify a new relationship to the Active Person, switch to
|
|
the Relationships View (<xref linkend="family-fig" />) and you'll see
|
|
this individual indicated as the "Active Person". Next to the
|
|
<guilabel>Family</guilabel> label is a <guibutton>Add</guibutton>
|
|
button (typically represented by a <guibutton>+</guibutton> sign).
|
|
Clicking the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button will display the Edit
|
|
Family dialog with the Active Person set as either the father or the
|
|
mother.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-family">
|
|
<title>Editing a family</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-family.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Editing a family.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>Now a question: Does the person who will form the relationship
|
|
with the Active Person already exist in the database? If yes, click
|
|
the <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button to the other person. You'll
|
|
then be able to browse through the list of people in the database to
|
|
select the one you want. If not, click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton>
|
|
button. This will allow you to add a new person to the database and to
|
|
specify the relationship this person has to the Active Person.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="select-person">
|
|
<title>Selecting a person</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/select-person.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Selecting a person.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<note id="spouse-filter">
|
|
<title>Filtering</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>By default, GRAMPS filters the displayed list to show only
|
|
those people who could theoretically have a relationship with the
|
|
Active Person. That is, GRAMPS only shows those people whose birth
|
|
dates and death dates fit within the lifetime of the Active Person.
|
|
If you wish, you can add a person to the list by clicking the
|
|
<guibutton>+</guibutton> button. To completely override the filter
|
|
and display all people from the database, check the <guilabel>Show
|
|
all</guilabel> box.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<para>To edit an existing relationship from the Relationships View,
|
|
click on the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button next to corresponding
|
|
Family entry. If there is more than one relationship in the list, you
|
|
can select the spouse or partner you want by clicking the
|
|
corresponding <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button next to the
|
|
relationship.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>To specify a new relationship in the Family List View, click on
|
|
the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button on the toolbar, and an empty
|
|
Edit Family dialog will open. At this point, you can add people to the
|
|
family.</para>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-spec-par">
|
|
<title>To Specify Parents</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>You can specify Active Person's parents in the Relationship
|
|
View(<xref linkend="family-fig" />). A little care is required to
|
|
prevent the creation of duplicate families. If you wish to add the
|
|
Active Person to an already existing family, you should click the
|
|
<guibutton>Select</guibutton> button. If the family including the
|
|
parents does not already exist, you should click the
|
|
<guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>If you click on the <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button, you
|
|
are presented with the Select Family dialog. This will allow you to
|
|
select the existing family, and then the Active Person will be added
|
|
as a child to the family.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="select-family">
|
|
<title>Selecting a family</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/select-family.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Selecting a family.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>If you click on the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button, a new
|
|
Edit Family dialog is presented with the Active Person listed a child
|
|
of the new family. You can add the parents to the family by either
|
|
adding new people as the parents or selecting existing people as the
|
|
parents.</para>
|
|
|
|
<warning>
|
|
<para>If you create a new family and select parents that are already
|
|
in an existing family, GRAMPS will issue a warning message. If you
|
|
proceed by saving the new famiy, you will have a duplicate
|
|
family.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="family-warn">
|
|
<title>Duplicate family warning</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/family-warn.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Duplicate family warning.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
</warning>
|
|
|
|
<para>You can also specify the parents of a person in the Family List
|
|
View. If the family already exists, click on the
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button on the tool bar and add the person
|
|
as a child when the Edit Family dialog is displayed. If the family
|
|
does not already exist, click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button to
|
|
create a new family, and add the appropriate parents and
|
|
children.</para>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-spec-ch">
|
|
<title>To Specify Children</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Adding children to a relationship is done through a similar
|
|
proceedure. From the Relationships View or the Family List View,
|
|
select the existing family or create a new family. Children can be
|
|
added by selecting the Add button or Select button to the right of the
|
|
child list.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>Clicking the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button will display the
|
|
Edit Person dialog, allowing you to enter a new person. Clicking on
|
|
the <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button, will allow you to select an
|
|
existing person from a list. By default, the child is added with a the
|
|
relationship type of birth to both parents.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>If you wish to change the parent/child relationship from the
|
|
default setting of birth, select the child and click on the Edit
|
|
button. This will display the Edit Child Reference dialog.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="child-ref">
|
|
<title>Child Reference Editor</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/child-ref.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Child Reference Editor.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-add-img">
|
|
<title>Adding Photos and Other Media Objects</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>You can add photos and other media objects to individual people,
|
|
events, sources, and places. You can also add images that might not be
|
|
limited to a single person or event (for example, group family
|
|
photos).</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>If you want to add an image to a single person, switch to the
|
|
People View (<xref linkend="side-nofilt-fig" />), select a person, and
|
|
then click the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> icon on the toolbar. This
|
|
will bring up the <guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel> dialog (<xref
|
|
linkend="edit-pers-fig" />). Next, select the
|
|
<guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab, and click the
|
|
<guibutton>+</guibutton> button to call up the <guilabel>Select a
|
|
media object</guilabel> dialog. Type a filename or browse to find the
|
|
image file you want and then provide a title for that image. Keep
|
|
adding images until you are done.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>To add images related to a relationship (for example, a
|
|
marriage), switch to the Family View (<xref linkend="family-fig" />)
|
|
and double-click on the Spouse box. This calls up the
|
|
<guilabel>Marriage/Relationship editor</guilabel> dialog. Select the
|
|
<guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab and click the
|
|
<guibutton>+</guibutton> button to add an image.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>To add images related to a source or a place, first switch to
|
|
the Source View (<xref linkend="sources-fig" />) or Place View (<xref
|
|
linkend="places-fig" />). Select the source or place you want and then
|
|
either double-click on it or click the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>
|
|
icon on the toolbar. Select the <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab and
|
|
click the <guibutton>+</guibutton> button to add an image.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>Finally, to add images that you want to include in the database,
|
|
but hare are not limited to any particular person, relationship,
|
|
source or place, switch to the Media View (<xref
|
|
linkend="media-fig" />). Then click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton>
|
|
icon on the toolbar to add an image. If you have already added any
|
|
images to any individual galleries, you will also find them listed in
|
|
the Media View.</para>
|
|
|
|
<note id="alt-add-image">
|
|
<title>Alternate way of adding images to galleries</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>An image can always be added to any gallery by using
|
|
drag-and-drop. Items can be dragged from the Media View, any
|
|
gallery, the desktop, the file manager or a web browser and dropped
|
|
on the target gallery, adding the image to the gallery.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<para>In any gallery, you can also use the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>
|
|
to edit image information and the <guibutton>-</guibutton> button and
|
|
to remove the image reference from that gallery.</para>
|
|
|
|
<note id="remove-image-from-gallery">
|
|
<title>Removing an image from a gallery</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Removing a media object from a gallery does not remove the
|
|
image from the database. To completely remove the image from the
|
|
database, delete it from Media View by first selecting it and then
|
|
clicking the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> icon on the
|
|
toolbar.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-edit-src-plc">
|
|
<title>To Edit Events, Sources, Places, and Repositories</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>To add an event, a source, a place, or a repository to
|
|
the database, switch to the appropriate Events View (<xref
|
|
linkend="events-fig" />), Sources View (<xref
|
|
linkend="sources-fig" />), Places View (<xref
|
|
linkend="places-fig" />), or Repositories View (<xref
|
|
linkend="repository-fig" />). Then click the
|
|
<guibutton>Add</guibutton> icon on the toolbar to add the
|
|
corresponding object. Enter the information into the
|
|
<guilabel>Event Editor</guilabel> (<guilabel>Source
|
|
Editor</guilabel>, <guilabel>Place Editor</guilabel>, or
|
|
<guilabel>Repository Editor</guilabel>) dialog.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>To edit information about events, sources, places, and
|
|
repositories already present in the database, switch to the
|
|
appropriate view, select an entry you would like to
|
|
view/modify, and then click the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>
|
|
icon on the toolbar. Alternatively, you may double-click on
|
|
the entry to edit it.</para>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="gramps-edit-complete">
|
|
<title>Entering and Editing Data: Complete Description</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>The previous section offered you a quick overview of how to enter
|
|
and edit data in GRAMPS. This section continues that discussion in much
|
|
greater detail.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>As we have seen above, GRAMPS offers you a series of Views. Each
|
|
of these Views gives you opportunities to enter and edit information. In
|
|
fact, you can often get to the same information from different
|
|
Views.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>In GRAMPS, information is entered and edited through what we call
|
|
dialogs. Since we use that term frequently, we should define what we
|
|
mean by it:</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>A dialog is a pop-up window that provides one or more
|
|
forms for entering and editing data that fits a certain
|
|
category. Examples in GRAMPS include the <guilabel>Edit
|
|
Person</guilabel> dialog and the <guilabel>Family
|
|
Editor</guilabel> dialog, among many others.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>A dialog often includes a series of "notebook tabs" that group the
|
|
information into subcategories. For example, the Edit Person dialog has
|
|
notebook tabs for subcategories such as Events, Attributes, Addresses,
|
|
and Notes, among others.</para>
|
|
|
|
<note id="edit-button-note">
|
|
<title>Add, Remove, and Edit buttons</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>In most cases, GRAMPS uses a <guibutton>+</guibutton> to
|
|
correspond to <guibutton>Add</guibutton>, a <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
correspond to <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>, and an icon of a pen on a
|
|
sheet of paper to denote <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>. We will continue
|
|
referring to the latter as the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button,
|
|
while using <guibutton>+</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> to
|
|
denote the two former buttons.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-pers">
|
|
<title>Editing Information About People</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Information about people is entered and edited through the
|
|
<guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel> dialog. This dialog can be invoked
|
|
from different Views in the following ways:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>From the People View:</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Double-click the name of the person whose data you
|
|
would like to edit</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Select the name by single click and then click the
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button on the toolbar.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Select the name and then press
|
|
<keycap>Enter</keycap>.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Select <guimenuitem>Edit...</guimenuitem> from the
|
|
<guisubmenu>Edit</guisubmenu> menu of GRAMPS</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Select <guimenuitem>Edit</guimenuitem> from the
|
|
context menu that appears upon right-click on the
|
|
name.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>From the Relationships View:</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>To edit the Active Person's data, click on the Edit button
|
|
next to the Active Person's name.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>From the Pedigree View:</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Double-click in the box having the name of the person
|
|
whose data you want to edit.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<para>In each of the above cases, the <guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel>
|
|
dialog will appear:</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-pers-fig">
|
|
<title>Edit Person dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-person.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Edit Person dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>The top of the window shows the basic information about the
|
|
person whose data is being edited. Below are several "notebook tabs"
|
|
containing different categories of available information. Click any
|
|
tab to view and edit its contents. Clicking the
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom will apply all the
|
|
changes made in all tabs and close the dialog window. Clicking the
|
|
<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button will close the window without
|
|
applying any changes. If any data in any tabs were modified, an alert
|
|
window will appear, prompting you to choose from the following
|
|
options: close the dialog without saving changes, cancel the initial
|
|
cancel request, or save the changes.</para>
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will immediately save
|
|
changes to the database. There is no need for a Save operation,
|
|
since all changes are immediate.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>If a tab label is in boldface type, this means it contains
|
|
data. If not, it has no data.</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<para>The general information is at the top of the window. This
|
|
includes the primary name and general information.:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Primary Name</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>includes <guilabel>Given name</guilabel>, <guilabel>Family
|
|
name</guilabel>, <guilabel>Family prefix</guilabel> (such as
|
|
"de" or "van"), <guilabel>Suffix</guilabel> (e.g. Jr. or III),
|
|
<guilabel>Title</guilabel> (e.g. Dr. or Rev.),
|
|
<guilabel>Nickname</guilabel> (Bob for Robert),
|
|
<guilabel>Type</guilabel> of the name (birth name, married name,
|
|
etc.). Some of these <guilabel>Family name</guilabel> and
|
|
<guilabel>Type</guilabel> fields provide "autocompletion"
|
|
feature: as you type in these fields, a menu appears below the
|
|
field containing database entries that match your partial input.
|
|
This gives you a shortcut by letting you select an entry that
|
|
already exists in the database rather than having to type it all
|
|
out. You can select the entry using your mouse or using your
|
|
arrow and <keycap>Enter</keycap> keys.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Edit</guilabel> (that is, the "pen and
|
|
paper" icon) next to the <guilabel>Prefix</guilabel> entry field
|
|
invokes the <guilabel>Name Editor</guilabel> dialog. This dialog
|
|
allows editing the preferred name in full detail (see <xref
|
|
linkend="adv-an" />).</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>General</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Gender</guilabel> menu offers the choice of
|
|
person's gender : <guilabel>male</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>female</guilabel>, and
|
|
<guilabel>unknown</guilabel>.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The field <guilabel>ID</guilabel> displays the GRAMPS ID
|
|
number which identifies the user in the database. This value
|
|
helps you distiguish between people who have the same name. You
|
|
may enter any unique value you want. If you do not provide a
|
|
value, GRAMPS will automatically select a value for you.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Marker</guilabel> allows you to specify some
|
|
basic information on the status of your research.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Privacy</guilabel> button lets you mark
|
|
whether or not the person's record is considered private.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Image</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Image</guilabel> area shows the first image
|
|
available in the <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> of this person (if
|
|
any exist).</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<para>The tabs reflect the following categories of personal
|
|
data:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Events</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Events</guilabel> tab lets you view and edit
|
|
any events relevant to the person. The bottom part of the window
|
|
lists all such events stored in the database. The top part shows
|
|
the details of the currently selected event in the list (if
|
|
any). The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> allow
|
|
you to add, modify, and remove an event record from the
|
|
database. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when an
|
|
event is selected from the list.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Names</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Names</guilabel> tab lets you view and edit
|
|
any alternate names the person may have. The bottom part of the
|
|
window lists all alternate names for the person stored in the
|
|
database. The top part shows the details of the currently
|
|
selected name in the list (if any). The buttons
|
|
<guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow the addition, modification, and
|
|
removal of an alternate name from the database. Note that the
|
|
Edit and - buttons become available only when an alternate name
|
|
is selected from the list.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-pers-names-fig">
|
|
<title>Edit Person dialog - Names</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-person-names.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Names Tab of Edit Person dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>When you add a new name or edit an existing name, the
|
|
<guilabel>Name Editor</guilabel> dialog is invoked. This dialog
|
|
is described in the section below (see <xref
|
|
linkend="adv-an" />).</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Attributes</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Attributes</guilabel> tab lets you view and
|
|
assign attributes to the person. You have complete freedom to
|
|
define and use attributes. For example, attributes might be
|
|
assigned to describe the person's physical characteristics or
|
|
personality traits.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>Note that each attribute listed in the
|
|
<guilabel>Attribute</guilabel> dialog consists of two parts: the
|
|
Attribute itself and a Value associated with that Attribute.
|
|
This so-called "Parameter-Value" pairing can help you organize
|
|
and systematize your research. For example, if you define "Hair
|
|
color" as an Attribute for a person, "Hair Color" will become a
|
|
selectable Attribute for all other people. The Value of Hair
|
|
Color for person A might be red, and brown for person B. In
|
|
similar fashion, you might define an Attribute like "Generosity"
|
|
and use the Value of "Enormous" to describe a particularly
|
|
generous person.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The bottom part of the dialog window displays the list of
|
|
all Attributes stored in the database. The top part shows the
|
|
details of the currently selected attribute in the list (if
|
|
any). The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> let
|
|
you add, modify, and remove an attribute record from the
|
|
database. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when an
|
|
attribute is selected from the list.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-pers-attributes-fig">
|
|
<title>Edit Person dialog - Attributes</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-person-attributes.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Attributes Tab of Edit Person
|
|
dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Addresses</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Addresses</guilabel> tab lets you view and
|
|
record the various addresses of the person. The bottom part of
|
|
the window lists all addresses stored in the database. The top
|
|
part shows the details of the currently selected address in the
|
|
list (if any). The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> allow
|
|
you to correspondingly add, modify, and remove an address record
|
|
from the database. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when an
|
|
address is selected from the list.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>Some reports allow you to restrict data on living people.
|
|
In particular, that option will omit their addresses.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-pers-addresses-fig">
|
|
<title>Edit Person dialog - Addresses</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-person-addresses.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Addresses Tab of Edit Person
|
|
dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Notes</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<figure id="edit-pers-notes-fig">
|
|
<title>Edit Person dialog - Notes</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-person-notes.png"
|
|
format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Notes Tab of Edit Person dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Notes</guilabel> tab provides a place to
|
|
record various items about the person that do not fit neatly
|
|
into other categories. To add a note or modify existing notes
|
|
simply edit the text in the text entry field.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Format</guilabel> option lets you set the
|
|
way the note will appear in reports and web pages. If you select
|
|
"Flowed," the text generated will have single spaces put in
|
|
place of all multiple spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line
|
|
characters. A blank line inserted between two blocks of text
|
|
will signal a new paragraph; additional inserted lines will be
|
|
ignored.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>If you select the Preformatted option, the text in reports
|
|
and web pages will appear exactly as you enter it in the Notes
|
|
dialog.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Sources</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<figure id="edit-pers-sources-fig">
|
|
<title>Edit Person dialog - Sources</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-person-sources.png"
|
|
format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Sources Tab of Edit Person
|
|
dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab allows you to view
|
|
and document the sources for the information you collect. These
|
|
might be general sources that do not describe a specific event,
|
|
but which nevertheless yield information about the person. For
|
|
example, if Aunt Martha's memoirs mention her great-grandson
|
|
Paul, the researcher may assume that this Paul actually existed
|
|
and cite Aunt Martha's memoirs as the source that justifies this
|
|
assumption.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>Sources which document specific events are best recorded
|
|
as sources of the event (under the <guilabel>Events</guilabel>
|
|
tab) instead of as a source of the person. The person's
|
|
<guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab is best used for any sources
|
|
not specificly connected to any other data.</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<para>The central part displays the list of all source
|
|
references stored in the database in relation to the person. The
|
|
buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>,
|
|
and <guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly add,
|
|
modify, and remove a source reference to this person. Note that
|
|
the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
buttons become available only when a source reference is
|
|
selected from the list.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Gallery</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab lets you view and
|
|
store photos, videos, and other media objects that are
|
|
associated with the person. The central part of the window lists
|
|
all such media objects. Any object in the form of a valid image
|
|
file will result in the display of a thumbnail view of the
|
|
image. For other objects such as audio files, movie files, etc.,
|
|
a corresponding file type icon is displayed instead.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>The first available image in the gallery will be also
|
|
displayed in the <guilabel>Image</guilabel> area in the
|
|
<guilabel>General</guilabel> tab.</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<para>The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Select</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add a new image to the
|
|
database, link to an image already stored in the database,
|
|
modify an image, and remove a given media object from the
|
|
person's gallery. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when a
|
|
media object is selected from the list.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-pers-gallery-fig">
|
|
<title>Edit Person dialog - Gallery</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-person-gallery.png"
|
|
format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Gallery Tab of Edit Person
|
|
dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>Removing a media object from a person's gallery does not
|
|
remove it from the database. It only removes the reference to
|
|
that object from this person's record.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Internet</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Internet</guilabel> tab displays Internet
|
|
addresses relevant to the person. The bottom part lists all such
|
|
Internet addresses and accompanying descriptions. The top part
|
|
shows the details of the currently selected addresses in the
|
|
list (if any). The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> let
|
|
you add, modify, and remove an Internet address. The "Go" button
|
|
(represented by an icon having a green arrow and yellow circle)
|
|
opens your web browser and takes you directly to the highlighted
|
|
page. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton>, and <guibutton>Go</guibutton> buttons
|
|
become available only when an address is selected from the
|
|
list.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-pers-internet-fig">
|
|
<title>Edit Person dialog - Internet</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-person-internet.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Internet Tab of Edit Person
|
|
dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Associations</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Associations</guilabel> tab lets you view
|
|
and edit information about the associations between people in
|
|
the database. The associations may include Godparents, family
|
|
friends, or any other types of associations you may wish to
|
|
record.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-pers-as-fig">
|
|
<title>Edit Person dialog - Associations</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-person-assoc.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Associations Tab of Edit Person
|
|
dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>LDS</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>LDS</guilabel> (Latter Days Saints) tab lets
|
|
you view and edit information about LDS ordinances of the
|
|
person. These are LDS Baptism, Endowment, and Sealed to Parents
|
|
ordinances, as labeled inside the tab. Each ordinance is
|
|
described by its date, LDS temple, and Place where it happened.
|
|
An additional pop-up menu, "Parents," is available for the
|
|
Sealed to Parents ordinance. Each ordinance can be further
|
|
described through the selections available in the Status pop-up
|
|
menu. It can also be include notes and references to sources
|
|
through the corresponding <guibutton>Sources...</guibutton> and
|
|
<guibutton>Note</guibutton> buttons.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-pers-lds-fig">
|
|
<title>Edit Person dialog - LDS</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-person-lds.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows LDS Tab of Edit Person dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-dates">
|
|
<title>Editing Dates</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>This section describes how to enter and modify dates. Since
|
|
dates are so important in genealogical research, GRAMPS takes special
|
|
care to preserve and use any date information available.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>Information can be entered into a date field by directly typing
|
|
it or by invoking the Date selection dialog. Both methods will be
|
|
discussed below, but first, we will cover some important features of
|
|
dates as they are used in GRAMPS.</para>
|
|
|
|
<sect3 id="adv-dates-types">
|
|
<title>Date types</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Dates in GRAMPS are classified according to the following
|
|
types:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Regular</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>A "regular" date is one which includes a specific day,
|
|
date, or month. It can be complete (e.g., June 6, 1990) or
|
|
partial (e.g., July 1977).</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Before</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>A "before" date is one that can only be identified as
|
|
occurring before a certain day, month, or year.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>After</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>An "after" date is one that occurs after a certain day,
|
|
month, or year.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Range</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>A "range" describes a time period during which the event
|
|
occurred. For example, "between January 1932 and March
|
|
1932."</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Span</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>A "span" describes a time period during which a
|
|
condition existed. For example, "from May 12, 2000 to February
|
|
2, 2002."</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
|
|
<sect3 id="adv-dates-parsing">
|
|
<title>Date formats and parsing rules</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>GRAMPS recognizes dates entered in a variety of formats. The
|
|
default numeric format is that which is conventional for the
|
|
environment is which GRAMPS is operating; that is, DD.MM.YYYY for
|
|
most European countries, MM/DD/YYYY for the U.S., and so on.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>Besides exact dates, GRAMPS recognizes many dates that are not
|
|
regular: before, after, about, ranges and spans. It also understands
|
|
the quality: estimated or calculated. Finally, it supports partial
|
|
dates and many alternative calendars. Below is the list of date
|
|
entry rules to allow precise date parsing.</para>
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
<title>Date parsing rules</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>The list only applys to the English version of GRAMPS. If
|
|
you are using localized version of GRAMPS, your version may or may
|
|
not provide a localized date parser. At the time of this writing,
|
|
localized parsers exist for French, German, Russian, Finnish,
|
|
Dutch and Spanish languages.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>If the localized parser is available for your version,
|
|
chances are that other rules are in effect. If there is no manual
|
|
in your language yet, you may try following your instinct and go
|
|
with the common ways of denoting dates in your language. If all
|
|
else fails, use the <guilabel>Date selection</guilabel> dialog
|
|
described below.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Regular single dates can be entered just as you would
|
|
write them. Examples: May 24, 1961 or January 1, 2004.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Dates that are not regular should start with the quality:
|
|
<guilabel>estimated</guilabel> or
|
|
<guilabel>calculated</guilabel>, if applicable. Example: est.
|
|
1961, or calc 2005. (Note that a quality does not need to be
|
|
specified for regular dates.)</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>After the quality should appear the type. If the type is
|
|
<guilabel>before</guilabel>, <guilabel>after</guilabel>, or
|
|
<guilabel>about</guilabel>, you scan specify the type by writing
|
|
"before", "after" or "about". If the type is a range, write
|
|
"between DATE and DATE", and if the type is a span, write "from
|
|
DATE to DATE". patterns, where DATE is a single date.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>Examples: est from 2001 to 2003, before June 1975, est
|
|
about 2000, calc between May 1900 and January 1, 1990.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Partial dates are entered simply by omitting unknown
|
|
information. Examples: May 1961 and 2004.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Alternate calendars are calendars other than the Gregorian
|
|
calendar. Currently, GRAMPS supports Hebrew, French Republican,
|
|
Julian, Islamic, and Persian alternate calendars. To specify the
|
|
calendar other than the default Gregorian, append the name of
|
|
the calendar to the date string, e.g. "January 9, 1905
|
|
(julian)".</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
|
|
<sect3 id="adv-dates-led">
|
|
<title>Date Validity Indicators</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>GRAMPS uses color circles to indicate the validity of the
|
|
entered date.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<title>Date LED buttons</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>The color circles are also referred to as the LED buttons.
|
|
Clicking on an LED button will invoke the <guilabel>Date
|
|
selection</guilabel> dialog described in detail below, see <xref
|
|
linkend="adv-dates-gui" /></para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>A green circle means that the date is valid and complete
|
|
regular date (e.g. May 24, 1961). In simple terms, green means
|
|
that the date corresponds to a unique date.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Yellow circle means that the date is valid but is not a
|
|
regular date. This could be the date of a different type: a
|
|
before date (before May 25, 1962), an after date (after May,
|
|
1960), an about date (about May 23, 1961), a range (between May
|
|
1, 1961 and May 31, 1961), or a span (from May 1, 1961 to May
|
|
31, 1961). It can also be a complete single date, but with
|
|
quality of Estimated or Calculated. Finally, it could be a
|
|
partial date, i.e. a regular quality single date missing some
|
|
portion, e.g. May 1961 or 1961.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>While partial dates do not uniquely define the day, they
|
|
allow at least for some type of comparisons between the
|
|
dates.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Red circle means that the date is not recognized as a
|
|
valid date (e.g. "Christmas week of 61", or "the summer when I
|
|
had surgery"). In such a case the date will be stored as a text
|
|
string and therefore cannot be compared other dates. As you can
|
|
see, it is best to avoid such date entries. It would be better,
|
|
for example, to enter a date of "December 1961" and then to add
|
|
the note "Christmas week of '61."</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
|
|
<sect3 id="adv-dates-gui">
|
|
<title>Graphical User Interface for Entering Dates</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>While the above parsing rules provide a guide for you to type
|
|
in most common dates, you can also use <guilabel>Date
|
|
selection</guilabel> dialog. The dialog is particularly useful for
|
|
building a complex date or for simply insuring that your information
|
|
is entered in a way GRAMPS will understand. The <guilabel>Date
|
|
selection</guilabel> dialog can be invoked by clicking the colored
|
|
circle button next to the date entry field.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para><figure id="adv-dates-gui-fig">
|
|
<title>Date selection dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/date-selection.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Date selection dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure></para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Calendar</guilabel> menu lets you choose a
|
|
calendar other than the default Gregorian. The
|
|
<guilabel>Quality</guilabel> menu gives you the choices of Regular,
|
|
Estimated, or Calculated. The <guilabel>Type</guilabel> menu allows
|
|
you establish the exact date type: Regular, Before, After, About,
|
|
Range, Span, and Text only. You can set the
|
|
<guilabel>Date</guilabel> by setting the day, the month, and the
|
|
year. In the event that your date type is Range or Span, the
|
|
<guilabel>Second date</guilabel> will be activated. Finally, the
|
|
<guilabel>Text comment</guilabel> text entry field allows storing an
|
|
arbitrary text string along with the date.</para>
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>If you have an important comment to make about a date, you
|
|
are better off doing so in a Note that corresponds to the event
|
|
than in the Text comment field of the Date selection dialog. We
|
|
recommend this for the following reason: If you enter a date by
|
|
typing it directly into the date field (that is, not via the Date
|
|
selector dialog), your entry will be copied and stored as the text
|
|
comment string when GRAMPS parses the entered text. Thus, any
|
|
comment that may have been there prior to the parsing will be
|
|
overwritten.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-rel">
|
|
<title>Editing Information About Relationships</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Information about relationships is entered and edited
|
|
through the <guilabel>Family Editor</guilabel> dialog. This
|
|
dialog may be invoked in a number of ways:</para>
|
|
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>From Relationships View: click on an
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button in the family that you want
|
|
to edit.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>From Family List View: select the family in the list
|
|
and then click the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button on the
|
|
Toolbar, or double-click on the family.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>From Pedigree View: point your mouse over the black
|
|
line connecting the spouses, right-click and select
|
|
<guilabel>Edit</guilabel> from the context menu, or
|
|
double-click on the black line.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
|
|
<para>Any of these methods will prompt you with the following
|
|
<guilabel>Family Editor</guilabel> dialog:</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-rel-fig">
|
|
<title>Family Editor dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-rel.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Family Editor dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>The top of the window shows the names of the people
|
|
whose relationship is being edited, as well as their birth and
|
|
death information. The main part of the window displays three
|
|
<guilabel>Relationship Information</guilabel> fields and the
|
|
seven notebook tabs representing different categories of
|
|
information about the relationship. Click any tab to view or
|
|
edit the information it contains. The bottom part has
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
|
|
buttons. Clicking the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at any
|
|
time will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the
|
|
dialog window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
|
|
button at any time will close the window without applying any
|
|
changes. If any of the data in any tab is modified, an alert
|
|
window will appear that will prompt you choose between closing
|
|
the dialog without saving changes, canceling the initial
|
|
cancel request, or saving the changes.</para>
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will immediately save
|
|
changes to the database. This version of GRAMPS does not have a
|
|
separate saving function, all changes are immediate.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>If a tab label is in boldface type, this means it contains
|
|
data. If not, it has no data.</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Relationship Information</guilabel>
|
|
section fields have the basic desciption of the
|
|
relationship. The <guilabel>GRAMPS ID</guilabel> field
|
|
displays the ID number which labels this relationship in the
|
|
database. The available types (such as Married, Unmarried,
|
|
etc.) can be chosen from the drop-down <guilabel>Relationship
|
|
type</guilabel> menu. The <guilabel>Marker</guilabel> allows
|
|
you to specify some basic information on the status of your
|
|
research.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The tabs provide the following information categories of
|
|
relationship data:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Children</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Children</guilabel> tab lets you
|
|
view and edit the list of children in this
|
|
relationship. The <guibutton>+</guibutton> button allows
|
|
entering a new person to the database and adding that
|
|
person as a child in this relationship. The
|
|
<guibutton>Select</guibutton> button lets you select an
|
|
existing person to be a child in the relationship. The
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button allows for editing
|
|
the relations between the selected child and the
|
|
parents. Finally, the <guibutton>-</guibutton> lets you
|
|
remove the selected child from the relationship.
|
|
Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only
|
|
when a child is selected from the list.</para>
|
|
|
|
<note><para>Removing a child from the list does
|
|
not delete that child from the database. It simply
|
|
removes the child from this relationship.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Events</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Events</guilabel> tab lets you view
|
|
and edit the list of events relevant to the
|
|
relationship. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add, modify, or remove
|
|
an event record from the database. Note that the
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
buttons become available only when an event is selected
|
|
from the list.</para>
|
|
|
|
<note><para>Removing an event from the list does
|
|
not delete that event from the database. It simply
|
|
removes the event reference from this relationship.
|
|
</para></note>
|
|
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Sources</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab lets you view
|
|
and edit a list of references to the sources that
|
|
provide evidence for the relationship. These might be
|
|
documents that refer to the relationship, but which do
|
|
not necessarily document it officially. For example, if
|
|
Aunt Martha's memoirs mention that her great-grandson
|
|
Paul was married, the researcher may take this as
|
|
evidence of the relationship between Paul and his wife
|
|
existed and cite the memoirs as the source for this
|
|
assumption.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>Sources that document specific events such as marriages
|
|
or divorces are better filed in relation to those events,
|
|
under the Events tab.</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<para>The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow let you add, modify, and
|
|
remove a source reference to this relationship. Note
|
|
that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only
|
|
when a source reference is selected from the
|
|
list.</para>
|
|
|
|
<note><para>Removing an entry from the list does
|
|
not delete that source from the database. It simply
|
|
removes the source reference from this relationship.
|
|
</para></note>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Attributes</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Attributes</guilabel> tab lets you view and
|
|
edit particular information about the relationship that can be
|
|
expressed as attributes. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> let
|
|
you add, modify, or remove an attribute. Note that the
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons
|
|
become available only when an attribute is selected from the
|
|
list.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Notes</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Notes</guilabel> tab lets you view and edit
|
|
notes associated with the relationship. These could be any
|
|
comments which do not naturally fit into the "Parameter-Value"
|
|
pairs available to Attributes. To add a note or modify existing
|
|
notes simply edit the text in the text entry field.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Format</guilabel> option lets you set the
|
|
way the note will appear in reports and web pages. If you select
|
|
Flowed, the text generated will have single spaces put in place
|
|
of all multiple spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line characters.
|
|
A blank line inserted between two blocks of text will signal a
|
|
new paragraph; additional inserted lines will be ignored.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>If you select the Preformatted option, the text in reports
|
|
and web pages will appear exactly as you enter it in the Notes
|
|
dialog.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Gallery</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab lets you store and
|
|
display photos and other media objects associated with the
|
|
relationship. The central part of the window lists all such
|
|
objects and gives you a thumbnail preview of image files. Other
|
|
objects such as audio files, movie files, etc., are represented
|
|
by a generic GRAMPS icon. The buttons <guilabel>+</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>Select</guilabel>, <guilabel>Edit</guilabel>, and
|
|
<guilabel>-</guilabel> let you add a new image, add a reference
|
|
to an existing image, modify an existing image, and remove a
|
|
media object's link to the relationship. Note that the
|
|
<guilabel>Edit</guilabel> and <guilabel>-</guilabel> buttons
|
|
become available only when a media object is selected from the
|
|
list.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>LDS</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>LDS</guilabel> (Latter Days Saints) tab
|
|
displays information about the LDS <guilabel>Sealed to
|
|
Spouse</guilabel> ordinance. The data can include date, LDS
|
|
temple, and Place. The status of the ordinance can be described
|
|
through the selections available in the
|
|
<guilabel>Status</guilabel> pop-up menu and can also be
|
|
referenced in the corresponding
|
|
<guibutton>Sources...</guibutton> and
|
|
<guibutton>Note</guibutton> buttons.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-src">
|
|
<title>Editing Information About Sources</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>To edit source data, switch to the Sources View and select the
|
|
desired entry in the list of sources. Double-click that entry or click
|
|
the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> icon on the toolbar to invoke the
|
|
following <guilabel>Source Editor</guilabel> dialog:</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-src-fig">
|
|
<title>Source Editor dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-src.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Source Editor dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>The main part of the window displays four notebook tabs
|
|
containing different categories of information. Click a tab to view or
|
|
edit its contents. The bottom part of the window has
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> buttons.
|
|
Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will apply all the changes made in
|
|
all tabs and close the dialog window. Clicking the
|
|
<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button will close the window without
|
|
applying any changes.</para>
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will immediately save
|
|
changes to the database (write on disk). All changes are
|
|
immediate.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>If a tab label is in boldface type, this means it contains
|
|
data. If not, it has no data.</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<para>The general information at the top of the window lets you define
|
|
basic information about the source: its <guilabel>Title</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>Author</guilabel>, <guilabel>Abbreviation</guilabel>, and
|
|
<guilabel>Publication information</guilabel>. You can type this
|
|
information directly into the adjacent fields.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The tabs provide the following information categories of source
|
|
data:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Note</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab provides a place to
|
|
record various information about the source that does not fit
|
|
neatly into other categories. To add a note or modify existing
|
|
notes simply edit the text in the text entry field.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Gallery</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab lets you store and
|
|
display photos and other media objects associated with a given
|
|
source (for example, a photo of a birth certificate). The
|
|
central part of the window lists all such media objects and
|
|
gives you a thumbnail preview of image files. Other objects such
|
|
as audio files, movie files, etc., are represented by a generic
|
|
GRAMPS icon. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Select</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add a new image, add a
|
|
reference to an existing image, modify an existing image, and
|
|
remove a media object's link to the source. Note that the
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons
|
|
become available only when a media object is selected from the
|
|
list.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Data</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Data</guilabel> tab displays "Key/Value"
|
|
pairs that may be associated with the source. These are similar
|
|
to the "Attributes" used for other types of GRAMPS records. The
|
|
difference between these Key/Value pairs and Attributes is that
|
|
Attributes may have source references and notes, while Key/Value
|
|
data may not.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The central part of the window lists all existing
|
|
Key/Value pairs. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton> and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add and remove pairs. To modify
|
|
the text of Key or Value, first select the desired entry. Then
|
|
click in either the Key or Value cell of that entry and type
|
|
your text. When you are done, click outside the cell to exit
|
|
editing mode.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Repositories</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Repositories</guilabel> tab displays the
|
|
references to the repositories in which the source is contained.
|
|
The list can be ordered by any of its column headings:
|
|
<guilabel>ID</guilabel>, <guilabel>Title</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>Call Number</guilabel>,and <guilabel>Type</guilabel>.
|
|
Double-clicking an entry allows you to view and edit the record.
|
|
You may also edit the reference. The buttons on the side of the
|
|
tab allow you add a new repository, link to (or share) an
|
|
existing repository, edit the reference to the repository, or
|
|
remove the reference.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>References</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>References</guilabel> tab lists all the
|
|
database records that refer to this source, if any. The list can
|
|
be ordered by any of its column headings:
|
|
<guilabel>Type</guilabel>, <guilabel>ID</guilabel>, or
|
|
<guilabel>Name</guilabel>. Double-clicking an entry allows you
|
|
to view and edit the record.</para>
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>Only primary objects can be shown in the
|
|
<guilabel>References</guilabel> tab: Person, Family, Event,
|
|
Place, or Media object. Secondary objects such as Names and
|
|
Attributes can only be accessed through the primary objects to
|
|
which they belong.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-plc">
|
|
<title>Editing Information About Places</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>To edit information about places, switch to the Places View and
|
|
select the desired entry from the list of places. Double-click that
|
|
entry or click the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button on the toolbar
|
|
to bring up the following <guilabel>Place Editor</guilabel>
|
|
dialog:</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-plc-fig">
|
|
<title>Place Editor dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-plc.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Place Editor dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>The main part of the window displays seven notebook tabs
|
|
containing different categories of information. Click a tab to view or
|
|
edit its contents. The bottom part of the window has
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> buttons.
|
|
Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will apply all the changes made in
|
|
all tabs and close the dialog window. Clicking the
|
|
<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button will close the window without
|
|
applying any changes.</para>
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will immediately save
|
|
changes to the database). All changes are immediate.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>If a tab label is in boldface type and displays an icon, this
|
|
means it contains data. If not, it has no data.</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<para>The tabs represent following categories of place data:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>General</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab you view and edit the
|
|
basic information about the place: the
|
|
<guilabel>Title</guilabel> which labels it in the database,
|
|
<guilabel>City</guilabel>, <guilabel>Church parish</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>County</guilabel>, <guilabel>State</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>Country</guilabel>, <guilabel>Longitude</guilabel>,
|
|
and <guilabel>Latitude</guilabel>. You can type this information
|
|
directly into the adjacent fields.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Other names</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Other names</guilabel> tab lets you view and
|
|
edit other names by which the place might be known. The bottom
|
|
part of the window lists all other names of the place stored in
|
|
the database. The top part of the window shows the details of
|
|
the currently selected name in the list (if any). The buttons
|
|
<guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add, modify, and remove a name
|
|
record. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when a
|
|
name is selected from the list.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Note</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab displays any comments or
|
|
notes concerning the place. To add a note or modify existing
|
|
notes simply edit the text in the text entry field.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Sources</guilabel></term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab lets you view and
|
|
edit sources relevant to a place. The central part of the window
|
|
lists all such source references stored in the database. The
|
|
buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>,
|
|
and <guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add, modify, and remove a
|
|
source reference associated with a place. Note that the
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons
|
|
become available only when a source reference is selected from
|
|
the list.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Gallery</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab lets you store and
|
|
display photos and other media objects associated with a given
|
|
place. The central part of the window lists all such media
|
|
objects and gives you a thumbnail preview of image files. Other
|
|
objects such as audio files, movie files, etc., are represented
|
|
by a generic GRAMPS icon. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Select</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add a new image, add a
|
|
reference to an existing image, modify an existing image, and
|
|
remove a media object's link to the place. Note that the
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons
|
|
become available only when a media object is selected from the
|
|
list.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Internet</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Internet</guilabel> tab contains Internet
|
|
addresses relevant to the place. The bottom part of the window
|
|
lists all such Internet addresses stored in the database. The
|
|
top part shows the details of the currently selected address in
|
|
the list (if any). The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> let
|
|
you add, modify, and remove an Internet address. The
|
|
<guibutton>Go</guibutton> button (represented by an icon with a
|
|
green arrow and yellow circle) opens your browser and takes you
|
|
to the web page corresponding to the highlighted Internet
|
|
address. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton>, and <guibutton>Go</guibutton> buttons
|
|
become available only when an address is selected from the
|
|
list.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>References</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>References</guilabel> tab indicates any
|
|
database records (events or LDS ordinances) that refer to a
|
|
place. This information cannot be modified from the Place Editor
|
|
dialog. Instead, the corresponding database record (e.g., a
|
|
birth event) has to be brought up and its place reference
|
|
edited.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-media">
|
|
<title>Editing Information About Media Objects</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>To edit media data, switch to the Media View and select the
|
|
desired entry in the list of sources. Double-click on that entry or
|
|
click <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> on the toolbar to invoke the
|
|
following <guilabel>Media Properties Editor</guilabel> dialog:</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-media-fig">
|
|
<title>Media Properties Editor dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-media.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Media Properties Editor dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>A thumbnail preview of the object is presented, along with a
|
|
summary of its properties (ID, path, and object type). The central
|
|
part of the window displays five notebook tabs containing different
|
|
categories of information. Click a tab to view or edit its contents.
|
|
The bottom part of the window has <guibutton>OK</guibutton> and
|
|
<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> buttons. Clicking
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> will apply all the changes made in all tabs
|
|
and close the dialog window. Clicking the
|
|
<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button will close the window without
|
|
applying any changes.</para>
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will immediately save
|
|
changes to the database (write on disk). All changes are
|
|
immediate.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>If a tab label is in boldface type, this means it contains
|
|
data. If not, it has no data.</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<para>The tabs represent the following categories of media
|
|
data:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>General</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab lets you view and
|
|
edit the object's Title and Date. You can type this information
|
|
directly into the corresponding fields. For the Date, you can
|
|
also enter information by clicking the LED button and invoking
|
|
the <guilabel>Date selection</guilabel> dialog.</para>
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>Every media object is referred to by its Path. The user
|
|
is responsible for keeping track of the object files. GRAMPS
|
|
will only reference and display the contents, not manage the
|
|
files themselves.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Attributes</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Attributes</guilabel> tab lets you view and
|
|
edit particular information about the media object that can be
|
|
expressed as Attributes. The bottom part displays the list of
|
|
all such attributes stored in the database. The top part shows
|
|
the details of the currently selected attribute in the list (if
|
|
any). The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> let
|
|
you add, modify, or remove an attribute. Note that the
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons
|
|
become available only when an attribute is selected from the
|
|
list.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Notes</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab provides a place to
|
|
record various information about the source that does not fit
|
|
neatly into other categories. This area is particularly useful
|
|
for recording information that does not naturally fit into the
|
|
"Parameter/Value" pairs available to Attributes. To add a note
|
|
or modify existing notes simply edit the text in the text entry
|
|
field.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>References</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>References</guilabel> tab indicates any
|
|
database records that refer to a given media object. The list
|
|
can be ordered according to any of its column headings:
|
|
<guilabel>Type</guilabel>, <guilabel>ID</guilabel>, or
|
|
<guilabel>Name</guilabel>. Double-clicking an entry allows you
|
|
to view and edit the corresponding record.</para>
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>Only primary objects can be shown in the
|
|
<guilabel>References</guilabel> tab: Person, Family, Event,
|
|
Source, or Place. The secondary objects such as Names and
|
|
Attributes, although able to refer the media object, will only
|
|
show up through their primary objects to which they
|
|
belong.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-ev">
|
|
<title>Editing Information About Events</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Events are edited through the <guilabel>Event Editor</guilabel>
|
|
dialog. This dialog can be accessed from either the <guilabel>Edit
|
|
Person</guilabel> dialog or the
|
|
<guilabel>Marriage/Relationship</guilabel> dialog.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-ev-fig">
|
|
<title>Event Editor dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-ev.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Event Editor dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>The central part of the window displays five notebook tabs
|
|
containing different categories of information. Click a tab to view or
|
|
edit its contents. The bottom part of the window has
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> buttons.
|
|
Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will apply all the changes made in
|
|
all tabs and close the dialog window. Clicking the
|
|
<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button will close the window without
|
|
applying any changes.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>If a tab label is in boldface type, this means it contains
|
|
data. If not, it has no data.</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<para>The tabs provide the following information categories of the
|
|
event data:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>General</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab lets you view and
|
|
edit basic information about the event: its
|
|
<guilabel>Type</guilabel>, <guilabel>Date</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>Place</guilabel>, <guilabel>Cause</guilabel>, and
|
|
<guilabel>Description</guilabel>. You can type this information
|
|
directly into the adjacent fields. The type can be selected from
|
|
available types listed in the Event type drop-down menu. The
|
|
rest of the information can be typed in the appropriate text
|
|
entry fields. Checking the Private record box marks the event
|
|
record as private and allows it to be omitted from
|
|
reports.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Sources</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab lets you view and
|
|
edit sources relevant to an event. The central part of the
|
|
window lists all such source references stored in the database.
|
|
The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> let
|
|
you add, modify, and remove a source reference associated with a
|
|
place. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when a
|
|
source reference is selected from the list.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Note</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab provides a place to
|
|
record notes or comments about the event. To add a note or
|
|
modify existing notes simply edit the text in the text entry
|
|
field.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<!-- END OF EDIT -->
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-si">
|
|
<title>Editing Source References</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Source references connect a Source to another object and allow
|
|
you to provide additional information about the source. When adding
|
|
source references to events, places, etc., the following dialog
|
|
appears:</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-si-fig">
|
|
<title>Source Information dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-si.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Source Information dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>The dialog includes two main headings, <guilabel>Source
|
|
selection</guilabel> and <guilabel>Source details</guilabel>.
|
|
<guilabel>Source selection</guilabel> displays the
|
|
<guilabel>Title</guilabel> of the Source, its
|
|
<guilabel>Author</guilabel>, and <guilabel>Publication
|
|
information</guilabel>. The <guilabel>Title</guilabel> can be selected
|
|
from the available sources listed in the drop-down menu. If the source
|
|
you are referencing is not already in the database, you can enter it
|
|
by clicking <guibutton>New...</guibutton> and filling out the invoked
|
|
<guilabel>Source Editor</guilabel> dialog.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Source details</guilabel> section indicates the
|
|
details associated with the particular reference to this Source:
|
|
<guilabel>Confidence</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>Volume/Film/Page</guilabel>, <guilabel>Date</guilabel>,
|
|
<guilabel>Text</guilabel>, and <guilabel>Comments</guilabel>. You can
|
|
choose the Confidence level from the <guilabel>Confidence</guilabel>
|
|
drop-down menu. The remaining details can be typed in the
|
|
corresponding text entry fields.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>Information in this dialog is specific to the particular
|
|
reference. A single source can be referenced many times, and all
|
|
such references will have in common the overall source information.
|
|
This dialog lets you provide reference-specific data, such as
|
|
relevant quotes, comments, confidence, page numbers, etc., to
|
|
further specify and document the reference.</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-an">
|
|
<title>Names</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Names are edited through the following <guilabel>Name
|
|
Editor</guilabel> dialog:</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-an-fig">
|
|
<title>Name Editor dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-an.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Name Editor dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>The top of the window shows the dialog title including the name
|
|
of the person whose name is being edited. The central part of the
|
|
window displays three notebook tabs containing different categories of
|
|
available information. You can bring any tab to the top for viewing or
|
|
editing by clicking on the appropriate tab heading. The bottom part
|
|
has <guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
|
|
buttons. Clicking the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at any time
|
|
will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the dialog
|
|
window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button at any time
|
|
will close the window without applying any changes.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>The tab labels reflect the presence of corresponding
|
|
information: if the tab contains any data, its label appears
|
|
boldface; if the tab has no data then its label appears regular (not
|
|
bold).</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<para>The tabs provide the following information categories of the
|
|
name data:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>General</guilabel></term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab allows editing of
|
|
general information about the name: given name, family name,
|
|
patronymic (a form of father's name used in some languages, e.g.
|
|
Russian), family prefix, suffix, title, and type of the name.
|
|
The information can be typed in the appropriate text entry
|
|
fields. The family name and the type can be also selected from
|
|
available choices listed in the appropriate drop-down
|
|
menus.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para><guilabel>Options</guilabel> allow you to adjust specific
|
|
grouping, sorting, and displaying properties of this name, as
|
|
well as to provide the date corresponding to the name. The
|
|
<guilabel>Grouping</guilabel> field provides an alternative
|
|
grouping node for a given name, overriding the default grouping
|
|
based on the family name. This may be necessary with similar
|
|
family names that need to be grouped together -- for example
|
|
Russian names Ivanov and Ivanova are considered the same, but
|
|
difference in gender is reflected in different spelling. To
|
|
enable typing into this field, check the
|
|
<guilabel>Override</guilabel> check button. The <guilabel>Sort
|
|
as</guilabel> and <guilabel>Display as</guilabel> determine the
|
|
manner in which the name appears in the People View and in the
|
|
reports. The <guilabel>Date</guilabel> can provide information
|
|
on the validity of this name -- use spans as necessary. Check
|
|
the <guilabel>Private record</guilabel> box to mark this name
|
|
record as private. This will give you a chance to omit this name
|
|
from being included in reports, if you choose so among the
|
|
report generation options.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Sources</guilabel></term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab displays information
|
|
about sources relevant to this name and controls allowing its
|
|
modification. The central part displays the list of all such
|
|
sources' references stored in the database. The buttons
|
|
<guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly add,
|
|
modify, and remove a source reference to this name. Note that
|
|
the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
buttons become available only when a source reference is
|
|
selected from the list.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Note</guilabel></term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab displays any notes
|
|
concerning the name. To add a note or modify existing notes
|
|
simply edit the text in the text entry field.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Format</guilabel> option allows you to set
|
|
the appearance of the note in the output (i.e. in reports and
|
|
web pages). Selecting <guilabel>Flowed</guilabel> will replace
|
|
all multiple spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line characters
|
|
with single space in the output. The two consecutive new lines
|
|
(i.e. an empty line) denote a new paragraph. Selecting
|
|
<guilabel>Preformatted</guilabel> will honor all multiple spaces
|
|
tabs, and new lines, so that the output will appear as it is
|
|
entered into the text entry field.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-at">
|
|
<title>Attributes</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Attributes are edited through the following <guilabel>Attribute
|
|
Editor</guilabel> dialog:</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-at-fig">
|
|
<title>Attribute Editor dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-at.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Attribute Editor dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>The top of the window shows the dialog title including the name
|
|
of the person whose attribute is being edited. The central part of the
|
|
window displays three notebook tabs containing different categories of
|
|
available information. You can bring any tab to the top for viewing or
|
|
editing by clicking on the appropriate tab heading. The bottom part
|
|
has <guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
|
|
buttons. Clicking the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at any time
|
|
will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the dialog
|
|
window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button at any time
|
|
will close the window without applying any changes.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>The tab labels reflect the presence of corresponding
|
|
information: if the tab contains any data, its label appears
|
|
boldface; if the tab has no data then its label appears regular (not
|
|
bold).</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<para>The tabs provide the following information categories of the
|
|
attribute data:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>General</guilabel></term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab allows editing of the
|
|
most general information about the attribute: name of the
|
|
attribute and its value. The information can be typed in the
|
|
appropriate text entry fields. The attribute name can also be
|
|
selected from available choices (if any) listed in the
|
|
<guilabel>Attribute </guilabel> drop-down menu. Check the
|
|
<guilabel>Private record</guilabel> box to mark this attribute
|
|
record as private. This will give you a chance to omit this
|
|
attribute from being included in the reports, if you choose so
|
|
among the report generation options.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Sources</guilabel></term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab displays information
|
|
about sources relevant to this attribute and controls allowing
|
|
its modification. The central part displays the list of all such
|
|
sources references stored in the database. The buttons
|
|
<guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly add,
|
|
modify, and remove a source reference to this attribute. Note
|
|
that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when a
|
|
source reference is selected from the list.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Note</guilabel></term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab displays any notes
|
|
concerning the attribute. To add a note or modify existing notes
|
|
simply edit the text in the text entry field.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Format</guilabel> option allows you to set
|
|
the appearance of the note in the output (i.e. in reports and
|
|
web pages). Selecting <guilabel>Flowed</guilabel> will replace
|
|
all multiple spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line characters
|
|
with single space in the output. The two consecutive new lines
|
|
(i.e. an empty line) denote a new paragraph. Selecting
|
|
<guilabel>Preformatted</guilabel> will honor all multiple spaces
|
|
tabs, and new lines, so that the output will appear as it is
|
|
entered into the text entry field.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-ad">
|
|
<title>Addresses</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Addresses are edited through the following <guilabel>Address
|
|
Editor</guilabel> dialog:</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-ad-fig">
|
|
<title>Address Editor dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-ad.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Address Editor dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>The top of the window shows the dialog title including the name
|
|
of the person whose address is being edited. The central part of the
|
|
window displays three notebook tabs containing different categories of
|
|
available information. You can bring any tab to the top for viewing or
|
|
editing by clicking on the appropriate tab heading. The bottom part
|
|
has <guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
|
|
buttons. Clicking the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at any time
|
|
will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the dialog
|
|
window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button at any time
|
|
will close the window without applying any changes.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>The tab labels reflect the presence of corresponding
|
|
information: if the tab contains any data, its label appears
|
|
boldface; if the tab has no data then its label appears regular (not
|
|
bold).</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<para>The tabs provide the following information categories of the
|
|
address data:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>General</guilabel></term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab allows editing of the
|
|
most general information about the address: date, street
|
|
address, city or county, state or province, country, the postal
|
|
code, and the phone number. The information can be typed in the
|
|
appropriate text entry fields. Check the <guilabel>Private
|
|
record</guilabel> box to mark this address record as private.
|
|
This will give you a chance to omit this address from being
|
|
included in reports, if you choose so among the report
|
|
generation options.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Sources</guilabel></term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab displays information
|
|
about sources relevant to this address and controls allowing its
|
|
modification. The central part displays the list of all such
|
|
sources references stored in the database. The buttons
|
|
<guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and
|
|
<guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly add,
|
|
modify, and remove a source reference to this address. Note that
|
|
the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton>
|
|
buttons become available only when a source reference is
|
|
selected from the list.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Note</guilabel></term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab displays any notes
|
|
concerning the address. To add a note or modify existing notes
|
|
simply edit the text in the text entry field.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Format</guilabel> option allows you to set
|
|
the appearance of the note in the output (i.e. in reports and
|
|
web pages). Selecting <guilabel>Flowed</guilabel> will replace
|
|
all multiple spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line characters
|
|
with single space in the output. The two consecutive new lines
|
|
(i.e. an empty line) denote a new paragraph. Selecting
|
|
<guilabel>Preformatted</guilabel> will honor all multiple spaces
|
|
tabs, and new lines, so that the output will appear as it is
|
|
entered into the text entry field.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="adv-merge">
|
|
<title>Merging records</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Sometime several records in the database turn out to be
|
|
describing the same object: same person, same place, or same source.
|
|
It could happen either when the data is entered twice by mistake, or
|
|
when new information reveals that the two entries refer to the same
|
|
person. It can also happen after importing GEDCOM obtained from a
|
|
relative, whose database overlaps with your existing data.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>Whenever you detect duplicate records, merging them a useful way
|
|
of correcting the situation.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>To make a merge, exactly two records have to be selected in
|
|
the appropriate view (People View, Sources View, or Places View).
|
|
This is accomplished by selecting one entry and then selecting
|
|
another person while holding down <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> key.</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<sect3 id="adv-merge-people">
|
|
<title>Merge People</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>There are two ways of merging personal records:
|
|
<guilabel>Compare and Merge</guilabel> and <guilabel>Fast
|
|
Merge</guilabel>, both available from the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
|
|
menu.</para>
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>Merging people does not discard any information with either
|
|
method. The decisions you make during the merge only affect which
|
|
data will become primary and which will become secondary for the
|
|
resulting merged record.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Compare and Merge</guilabel></term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>When exactly two people are selected, choose <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Compare and Merge...</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice> to invoke <guilabel>Compare People</guilabel>
|
|
dialog.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="comp-people-fig">
|
|
<title>Compare People dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/comp-people.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Compare People dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>The dialog allows you to make a decision on whether or
|
|
not the selected records should be merged. If you decide that
|
|
the records should not be merged, despite similar names, you
|
|
may click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to close the dialog
|
|
without making any changes. If you decide to proceed with
|
|
merging, select the appropriate <guilabel>Select</guilabel>
|
|
radio button to specify the record to be used as the source of
|
|
primary data, then click <guibutton>Merge and
|
|
close</guibutton>.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The data from the other record will be kept as alternate
|
|
data. Specifically, all names from the other record will
|
|
become alternate names of the merged record. Similarly,
|
|
parents, spouses, and children of the other record will become
|
|
alternate parents, spouses, and children of the merged record,
|
|
and so on.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Fast Merge</guilabel></term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>When exactly two people are selected, choose <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Fast Merge</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice> to invoke <guilabel>Merge People</guilabel>
|
|
dialog.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="merge-people-fig">
|
|
<title>Merge People dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/merge-people.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Merge People dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>The dialog allows you to quickly merge two records,
|
|
specifying the record to be used as the source of primary
|
|
data. The data from the other record will be kept as alternate
|
|
data. Specifically, all names from the other record will
|
|
become alternate names of the merged record. Similarly,
|
|
parents, spouses, and children of the other record will become
|
|
alternate parents, spouses, and children of the merged record,
|
|
and so on.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>If you are not certain whether or not you need to
|
|
merge the records, or which record to specify as the source
|
|
of primary data, use <guilabel>Compare and Merge</guilabel>
|
|
method described above..</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
|
|
<sect3 id="adv-merge-sources">
|
|
<title>Merge Sources</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>When exactly two sources are selected, choose <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Compare and Merge...</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice> to invoke <guilabel>Merge Sources</guilabel>
|
|
dialog.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="merge-src-fig">
|
|
<title>Merge Sources dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/merge-src.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Merge Sources dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>The dialog allows you to make a decision on whether or not the
|
|
selected records should be merged. If you decide that the records
|
|
should not be merged, despite similar titles, you may click
|
|
<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to close the dialog without making any
|
|
changes. If you decide to proceed with merging, choose the
|
|
appropriate radio button to specify the title, author, abbreviated
|
|
title, publication information, and the ID to be used for the merged
|
|
record, then click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
|
|
<sect3 id="adv-merge-places">
|
|
<title>Merge Places</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>When exactly two places are selected, choose <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Compare and Merge...</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice> to invoke <guilabel>Select title</guilabel>
|
|
dialog.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="merge-plc-fig">
|
|
<title>Merge Places dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/merge-plc.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Select title dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>The dialog allows you to make a decision on whether or not the
|
|
selected records should be merged. If you decide that the records
|
|
should not be merged, despite similar titles, you may click
|
|
<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to close the dialog without making any
|
|
changes. If you decide to proceed with merging, choose the
|
|
appropriate radio button to specify the title of the merged record,
|
|
or specify <guilabel>Other</guilabel> and enter new text, then click
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para>
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="gramps-nav">
|
|
<title>Navigation</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>As long as any database is open, GRAMPS is focused on a single
|
|
person usually referred to as an Active Person. This allows you to view
|
|
or modify the data concerning this person, his or her immediate family,
|
|
etc. Navigating in the database (i.e. moving from person to person) is
|
|
in fact nothing else but changing the Active Person. This section
|
|
describes many alternative ways to navigate through the database using
|
|
both the complex and the convenient interfaces GRAMPS provides. All
|
|
these ways eventually accomplish the same thing, but some are more
|
|
convenient than others, depending what you are doing in GRAMPS at the
|
|
moment.</para>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-nav-people">
|
|
<title>Using the People View</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>The most intuitive way to select an Active Person is to use the
|
|
People View (see <xref linkend="people-view" />). When in the People
|
|
View, just select the name of the desired person from the list by
|
|
clicking that list entry. The person you have selected becomes active.
|
|
The statusbar updates to reflect the change of the active
|
|
person.</para>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-nav-family">
|
|
<title>Using the Family View</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>When in the Family View (see <xref
|
|
linkend="relationships-view" />), you can easily navigate between the
|
|
members of the displayed family as follows:</para>
|
|
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>To make the currently selected spouse the Active Person,
|
|
click the double-arrow button to the right of the Active Person
|
|
box. Alternatively, right-click into the spouse box and select
|
|
<guilabel>Make the selected spouse an Active Person</guilabel>
|
|
item from the context menu.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>To make the currently selected parents the active family
|
|
(thereby making father the Active Person and mother the selected
|
|
spouse), click the right-arrow button to the right of the active
|
|
person's parents box. Alternatively, right-click into the active
|
|
person's parents box and select <guilabel>Make the selected
|
|
parents the active family</guilabel> item from the context
|
|
menu.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>To make the currently selected spouse's parents the active
|
|
family (thereby making father the Active Person and mother the
|
|
selected spouse), click the right-arrow button to the right of the
|
|
spouse's parents box. Alternatively, right-click into the spouse's
|
|
parents box and select <guilabel>Make the selected parents the
|
|
active family</guilabel> item from the context menu.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>To make the currently selected child the Active Person,
|
|
click the left-arrow button to the right of the children box.
|
|
Alternatively, right-click into the children box and select
|
|
<guilabel>Make the selected child an Active Person</guilabel> item
|
|
from the context menu.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
|
|
<para>In addition to this, GRAMPS provides an extensive set of
|
|
keyboard navigation options. The detailed reference to the key
|
|
bindings is found in the <xref linkend="append-keybind" />.</para>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-nav-pedigree">
|
|
<title>Using the Pedigree View</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>The Pedigree View (see <xref linkend="pedigree-view" />) also
|
|
allows you to move along the family tree. The benefit of this method
|
|
is that you can see more than one generation of the family tree. Also,
|
|
you can jump directly from a great-grandson to a great-grandfather
|
|
without going through the intermediate generations.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>Note that after changing the Active Person in the Pedigree View,
|
|
the display is re-adjusted to show up to five generations, starting from
|
|
the newly selected Active Person. When in the Pedigree View, you can
|
|
easily navigate between the members of the displayed family tree as
|
|
follows:</para>
|
|
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>To make any displayed person the Active Person, right-click
|
|
the corresponding box and choose the first entry in the context
|
|
menu.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>To make a child of the currently Active Person (if any) the
|
|
Active Person, click the left arrow button to the left of the
|
|
corresponding box. If there is more than one child, the button
|
|
expands to the menu listing the children to choose from.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>To move the whole family tree one generation back, click on
|
|
the corresponding right arrow button on the right-hand side of the
|
|
display area. Clicking the upper button will move the tree along
|
|
the paternal line. Clicking the lower button will move the tree
|
|
along the maternal line.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>Clicking either of these buttons is completely equivalent to
|
|
double-clicking the lines connecting to the left of the
|
|
corresponding boxes for father and mother.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
|
|
<para>You can also quickly access any of the spouses, siblings,
|
|
children, or parents of any displayed person. To do this, move the
|
|
mouse over the desired person's box and right-click to invoke a
|
|
context menu. The appropriate menu items will contain submenus listing
|
|
all spouses, siblings, children, and parents of the corresponding
|
|
person.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<title>Advantages of using right-click menus</title>
|
|
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Direct access to spouse and siblings</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Complete lists of all member of all categories, not only
|
|
the preferred members.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-nav-default">
|
|
<title>Setting the Home Person</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>One and only one person in the database can be selected as the
|
|
Home person. Once the Home person is selected, moving to that person
|
|
becomes a matter of a single click, regardless of which view you are
|
|
using at the moment.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>To set the Home person, first navigate to that person using any
|
|
method you like. Then choose <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Set Home person</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>. Once this is done, you can move to the Home person
|
|
from anywhere in the database by simply clicking the
|
|
<guibutton>Home</guibutton> icon on the toolbar. You can also choose
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Go</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Home</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice> from the menu or select <guilabel>Home</guilabel> item
|
|
from any context menu available on the right click.</para>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-nav-history">
|
|
<title>Using history-based tools</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>GRAMPS also features a powerful set of history-based navigation
|
|
tools. These tools are similar to those commonly used in web browsers.
|
|
They include <guilabel>Back</guilabel> and
|
|
<guilabel>Forward</guilabel> items available from the <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Go</guimenu>
|
|
</menuchoice> menu, context menus (available in People, Family, and
|
|
Pedigree views), and the toolbar buttons. They also include the list
|
|
of the recent selections available under the <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Go</guimenu>
|
|
</menuchoice> menu that allows you to jump directly to any of the
|
|
recent selections. Finally, right-clicking on the
|
|
<guibutton>Back</guibutton> and <guibutton>Forward</guibutton> toolbar
|
|
buttons invokes the popup menu with corresponding portion of the
|
|
history. Select any item from the menu to jump directly to it.</para>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-nav-bookmk">
|
|
<title>Bookmarking People</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Similar to setting the Home person, you can bookmark other
|
|
people from the database to simplify further navigation. To bookmark a
|
|
person, first navigate to that person, then choose <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Bookmarks</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Add bookmark</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>. To move to that person from anywhere in the database,
|
|
choose <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Bookmarks</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guisubmenu>Go to bookmark</guisubmenu>
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem><replaceable>Person's
|
|
name</replaceable></guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>You can manage your bookmarks by choosing <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Bookmarks</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Edit bookmarks...</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>. This opens the following <guilabel>Edit
|
|
Bookmarks</guilabel> dialog with the list of bookmarks and the
|
|
controls to modify this list.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="edit-bm-fig">
|
|
<title>Edit Bookmarks dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/edit-bm.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Edit Bookmarks dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-nav-find">
|
|
<title>Finding records</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>To find a record in a database, first switch to the appropriate
|
|
View that provides the list of the desired records: People, Sources,
|
|
Places, or Media. Then start typing the name of a person or the title
|
|
of a Source, Place, or Media object that you are looking for,
|
|
respectively. You may also press <keycap>Ctrl+F</keycap> to turn on
|
|
the search mode, but simply starting to type is also enough.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="find-people-fig">
|
|
<title>Type-ahead find</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/find-people.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows type-ahead find.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>As you type, the first record in the list that is compatible
|
|
with your input will be selected.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<title>Finding People</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>For more complex people searches you may want to use filters.
|
|
Enable filter controls by choosing <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>View</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Filter</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>, select the desired filter, and click
|
|
<guibutton>Apply</guibutton>. For details, see <xref
|
|
linkend="filters" /></para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="gen-reports">
|
|
<title>Generating Reports</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Reports are the most common form of the output produced by
|
|
genealogical research. The majority of genealogical software puts a lot
|
|
of emphasis on developing nice looking reports. GRAMPS is no exception
|
|
in this regard, offering a choice of a variety of reports. GRAMPS can
|
|
generate reports in a multitude of open formats, both text based and
|
|
graphical. GRAMPS can also produce screen based reports that are
|
|
convenient for viewing a summary of your database. Finally, GRAMPS can
|
|
generate a web site suitable for immediate posting on the Internet. All
|
|
of these are almost infinitely flexible. If you wish to modify or extend
|
|
the default format of GRAMPS report, you can design and choose the style
|
|
for each of your reports.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>All reports can be accessed through the menu by choosing
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Reports</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guisubmenu><replaceable>Report Type</replaceable></guisubmenu>
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem><replaceable>Particular
|
|
Report</replaceable></guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>. Alternatively, you can browse the complete selection of
|
|
available reports along with their brief descriptions in a
|
|
<guilabel>Report Selection</guilabel> dialog invoked by clicking the
|
|
<guibutton>Reports</guibutton> icon on the toolbar.</para>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="subst-values">
|
|
<title>Substitution Values</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Many of the graphical reports allow you to customize the
|
|
information on the display. Variable substitutions are used to
|
|
substitute date for a particular symbol. There are two styles of
|
|
variables. The difference between the two styles is how empty data is
|
|
handled.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The first style of variables are preceeded by a '$'. If the
|
|
variable evaluates to an empty string, the variable is replaced with
|
|
the empty string. The second style of variables are preceeded by a
|
|
'%'. If the variable evaluates to an empty string, the line that
|
|
contains the variable is removed from the output.</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>$n/%n</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Displays the person's name in the form of FirstName
|
|
LastName</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>$N/%N</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Displays the person's name in the form of LastName,
|
|
FirstName</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>$i/%i</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Displays the GRAMPS ID associated with the person.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>$b/%b</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Displays the person's date of birth</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>$B/%B</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Displays the person's place of birth</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>$d/%d</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Displays the person's date of death</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>$D/%D</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Displays the person's place of death</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>$s/%s</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Displays the name of the person's preferred spouse in the
|
|
form of FirstName LastName</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>$S/%S</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Displays the name of the person's preferred spouse in the
|
|
form of LastName, FirstName.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>$m/%m</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Displays the marriage date of the person and the preferred
|
|
spouse.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>$M/%M</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Displays the place assocated with the marriage of the
|
|
person and the preferred spouse.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="rep-books">
|
|
<title>Books</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Currently, the only available report under this category is the
|
|
Book Report.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The Book Report creates a single document (i.e. a Book)
|
|
containing a collection of graphical and textual reports.
|
|
Consequently, this allows for a very rich set of documents that GRAMPS
|
|
can produce.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>When Book Report is selected, the following book configuration
|
|
dialog appears:</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="rep-book-fig">
|
|
<title>Book Report dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/bookreport.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Book Report dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Book name</guilabel> text entry field is used to
|
|
save the book (a set of configured selections) for future use. The top
|
|
pane lists the items available for inclusion in the book. The bottom
|
|
pane lists the currently selected items in the order they will appear
|
|
in the book.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The horizontal set of buttons by the <guilabel>Book
|
|
name</guilabel> field operates on the whole book. Click the
|
|
<guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button to clear all items from the
|
|
current book. Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the
|
|
current book (under the name typed in the <guilabel>Book
|
|
name</guilabel> text entry field) for future use.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>Saving the book also saves the configuration for each
|
|
item.</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<para>Click the <guibutton>Open</guibutton> button to load the book
|
|
from the list of previously saved books. Finally, click the
|
|
<guibutton>Edit books</guibutton> button to invoke the editable list
|
|
of available books.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The vertical set of buttons to the right of the bottom pane
|
|
operates on the selected book item. Click the
|
|
<guibutton>Add</guibutton> button to add selected item from the
|
|
available list to the current book. Click the
|
|
<guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to remove an item from the
|
|
current book. Use <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and
|
|
<guibutton>Down</guibutton> to change the items order in the current
|
|
book. Click the <guibutton>Setup</guibutton> button to configure the
|
|
options of the selected item of the current book.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The configuration dialogs invoked by
|
|
<guibutton>Setup</guibutton> are item-specific. If you choose not to
|
|
configure the item, same defaults will be used for all needed options.
|
|
The common option for almost all book items is the center person: the
|
|
person on whom the item is centered. Thanks to this option, you can
|
|
create a book with items centered on different people (e.g. your mom's
|
|
and dad's ancestors as separate chapters). By default, the center
|
|
person is set to the Active Person.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>Almost all items available for inclusion in the book are textual
|
|
or graphical reports, and are therefore available in the form of
|
|
standalone reports. The exception is the following items which are
|
|
only available as book items:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Title Page</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This item produces a customized Title page. You can
|
|
configure the text of title, subtitle, and the footer of the
|
|
page. An image can be optionally placed between the subtitle and
|
|
the footer. Because of its configurability, this item can be
|
|
used to create title pages for the whole book, its chapter, or
|
|
even a single item.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Custom Text</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This item produces a page with three paragraphs, each
|
|
containing custom text. The appearance of the text can be
|
|
adjusted by using custom styles. This item was meant to be used
|
|
for epigraphs, dedications, explanations, notes, and so
|
|
forth.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="rep-codegen">
|
|
<title>Code Generators</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>This category contains reports that produce files that are meant
|
|
to be processed by other programs. By themselves, the files will not
|
|
provide meaningful information; the files must first be processed by
|
|
another program. The only code generator currently available in GRAMPS
|
|
is the Relationship Graph producing the GraphViz description of the
|
|
graph.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The Relationship Graph creates a complex relationship graph in
|
|
GraphViz format. The GraphViz <command>dot</command> tool can
|
|
transform the graph into postscript, jpeg, png, vrml, svg, and other
|
|
formats. GraphViz tools are freely available from the <ulink
|
|
type="http" url="http://www.graphviz.org">GraphViz site</ulink>.
|
|
Specific options for this report include filter and number of
|
|
generations considered, as well as several GraphViz-specific options
|
|
related to pagination, color, and details of the graph.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>If you are not interested in GraphViz code itself and just
|
|
want to generate graphical output, GRAMPS can do it for you under
|
|
the hood. Look for <guilabel>Relationship Graph</guilabel> in the
|
|
Graphical Reports category, <xref linkend="rep-graph" /></para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="rep-graph">
|
|
<title>Graphical Reports</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Graphical reports represent information in forms of charts and
|
|
graphs. Most of the options are common among graphical reports,
|
|
therefore they will be described only once, at the end of this
|
|
section. The few options which are specific to a given report will be
|
|
described directly in that report's entry.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The following graphical reports are currently available in
|
|
GRAMPS:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Ancestor Chart</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This report generates the chart of people who are
|
|
ancestors of the Active Person. Specific options include the
|
|
number of generations considered and the format of the displayed
|
|
entries.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Ancestor Chart (Wall Chart)</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This report is similar to the Ancestor Chart report. It
|
|
provides more options which make it useful for generating huge
|
|
charts suitable for a poster or a wall chart. These options
|
|
include the ability to compress the report (getting rid of an
|
|
empty space) and the option to fit the whole chart on to a
|
|
single page. In the latter case, the contents of the chart is
|
|
scaled down appropriately.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Descendant Graph</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This report generates a graph of people who are
|
|
descendants of the Active Person. Specific options include the
|
|
format of the displayed entries.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Fan Chart</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This report produces a chart resembling a fan, with Active
|
|
person in the center, parents the the semicircle next to it,
|
|
grandparents in the next semicircle, and so on, for a total of
|
|
five generations.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Relationship Graph</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This report creates a complex relationship graph in
|
|
GraphViz format and then converts into graphical output running
|
|
it through the the GraphViz <command>dot</command> tool behind
|
|
the scene. Specific options for this report include filter,
|
|
options for dates and places for the events, and whether to
|
|
include URLs and IDs for individuals and families. There are
|
|
also several GraphViz-specific options related to pagination,
|
|
color, and details of the graph.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Statistics Chart</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This report can collect and display a wealth of
|
|
statistical data about your database. Specific options include
|
|
filter, sorting methods, and additional birth- and gender-based
|
|
limit for inclusion into statistics. You can also set the
|
|
minimum number of items to qualify for the bar chart, so that
|
|
the charts with fewer items will generate a pie chart instead.
|
|
The <guilabel>Chart Selection</guilabel> tab allows you to check
|
|
which charts you want to include in your report.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Timeline Graph</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This report outputs the list of people with their
|
|
lifetimes represented by intervals on a common chronological
|
|
scale. Specific options include filter, sorting method, and the
|
|
title of the report.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<para>Common options for graphical reports are the filename of the
|
|
output, the format of the output, selected style, page size and
|
|
orientation. Optionally, the reports can be immediately opened with
|
|
the default application.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>The options used in reports are persistent: each report
|
|
remembers its options used last time.</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="rep-text">
|
|
<title>Text Reports</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Text reports represent the desired information as formatted
|
|
text. Most of the options are common among text reports, therefore
|
|
they will be described only once, at the end of this section. The
|
|
options which are specific to a given report will be described
|
|
directly in that report's entry.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The following text reports are currently available in
|
|
GRAMPS:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Ahnentafel Report</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This report lists the Active Person and his or her
|
|
ancestors along with their vital data. The people are numbered
|
|
in a special way which is an established standard called
|
|
Ahnentafel. The Active Person is given number 1. His or her
|
|
father and mother have numbers 2 and 3, respectively. This rule
|
|
holds for every person while going back in generations: father's
|
|
parents are numbered 4 and 5, and mother's parents are numbered
|
|
6 and 7, fathers always numbered with even and mothers with odd
|
|
numbers. Therefore, for any person having number N in this tree,
|
|
the numbers of father and mother are 2N and 2N+1,
|
|
respectively.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Complete Individual Report</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This report provides individual summaries similar to that
|
|
of the Individual Summary report. The advantage of this report
|
|
is the specific filter option. Depending on the filter choice
|
|
(Active Person only, his or her descendants, his or her
|
|
ancestors, or entire database), the report may contain from one
|
|
to many individual summaries. Another option for this report is
|
|
the inclusion of source information when listing events.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Comprehensive Ancestors Report</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This report produces a comprehensive description of
|
|
ancestors of the Active Person. The highlights of this report
|
|
include elaborate layout, images of children, present and former
|
|
spouses, and source citations. Specific options: number of
|
|
backward generations to consider, whether to cite sources, and
|
|
whether to break pages between generations.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Descendant Report</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This report produces a brief description of descendants of
|
|
the Active Person. Specific options: number of forward
|
|
generations to consider.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Detailed Ancestral Report</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This report covers in detail the ancestors of the active
|
|
person. It includes vital data (birth and death) as well as
|
|
marriages. Specific options: number of backward generations to
|
|
consider, as well as a variety of options regarding the exact
|
|
contents to include.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Detailed Descendant Report</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This report covers in detail the descendants of the active
|
|
person. It includes vital (birth and death) information as well
|
|
as marriages. Specific options: number of forward generations to
|
|
consider.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>FTM Style Ancestral Report</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This report creates an ancestral report similar to that
|
|
produced by the Family Tree Maker (tm) program. It covers in
|
|
detail the Active Person and his/her ancestors It includes vital
|
|
information as well as marriages, children, and notes. Specific
|
|
options: number of backward generations to consider.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>FTM Style Descendant Report</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This report creates a descendant report similar to that
|
|
produced by the Family Tree Maker (tm) program. It covers in
|
|
detail the Active Person and his/her descendants. It includes
|
|
vital information as well as marriages, children, and notes.
|
|
Specific options: number of forward generations to
|
|
consider.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Family Group Report</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This creates a family group report, showing information on
|
|
a set of parents and their children. Specific options: the
|
|
spouse (available only if the Active Person has more than one
|
|
spouse).</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Individual Summary</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This report produces a detailed summary on the active
|
|
person. The report includes all the facts known to the database
|
|
about that person.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<para>Common options for text reports are the filename of the output,
|
|
the format of the output, selected style, page size and orientation.
|
|
For HTML reports, there is no page information. Instead, HTML options
|
|
include the choice of the HTML template, either available in GRAMPS or
|
|
a custom template defined by you. Optionally, the reports can be
|
|
immediately opened with the default application.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>The options used in reports are persistent: each report
|
|
remembers its options used last time.</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="rep-view">
|
|
<title>View Reports</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>View reports are representing overall summaries of the database
|
|
information available immediately for on-screen viewing. The following
|
|
view reports are currently available in GRAMPS:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Number of ancestors</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This report displays the number of ancestors of the active
|
|
person.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Summary of the database</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This report displays the overall statistics concerning
|
|
number of individuals of each gender, various incomplete entries
|
|
statistics, as well as family and media statistics.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="rep-web">
|
|
<title>Web Page</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>The only available report in this category is the Narrative Web
|
|
Site report. It generates a web site (that is, a set of linked web
|
|
pages), for a set of selected individuals.</para>
|
|
|
|
<sect3 id="rep-web-narr">
|
|
<title>Narrative Web Site</title>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Introduction</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>GRAMPS 2.0.6 introduced the Narrative Web generator. The
|
|
new tool provides considerably more functionality than the
|
|
older web generator. Instead of using HTML templates to
|
|
customize the pages, CSS style sheets are used.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>More information is now displayed about each person,
|
|
along with information about sources, places, and media
|
|
objects. Introduction pages can be added to provide additional
|
|
information, such as family history.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Selecting the output</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Genealogy records can generate a lot of files. Many web
|
|
servers have a difficult time with many files in a single
|
|
directory. The Narrative Web Generator strives to keep the
|
|
number of files per directory to a managable level. To do
|
|
this, a hierarchy of directores is created. The generated
|
|
files names are not intuitive, but are unique per person.
|
|
Subsequent runs will geneate identical file names, making it
|
|
easy to replace files.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>By default, the output files are written to the
|
|
specified directory. Because of the number of files and
|
|
directories that are created, it may be difficult to transfer
|
|
the files to an external web host. To aid in this, you may
|
|
directly create a gzip'd tar file to more easily upload the
|
|
data. This is the format that should be used if you would like
|
|
to take advantage of the free genealogy page hosting at the
|
|
<ulink type="http"
|
|
url="http://family.gramps-project.org">GRAMPS web hosting
|
|
site</ulink>.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>To select the gzip'd tar file, select the
|
|
<guilabel>Store web pages in .tar.gz archive</guilabel>
|
|
option.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Applying a filter</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Like the previous web page generator, and most of the
|
|
other GRAMPS reports, you can control what is included in the
|
|
output by choosing a filter. Several default filters are
|
|
provided for you, but you are free to use the Custom Filter
|
|
Editor tool to create your own.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>Any person matching this filter who is not excluded due
|
|
to the privacy rules, will be included in the output. The
|
|
default filter includes all people in the database.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Applying a style sheet</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>GRAMPS provides six built in style sheets for your web
|
|
page. Each of these style sheets produces a unique look for
|
|
your pages. The generated style sheet is named
|
|
<filename>narrative.css</filename>. You may edit this file if
|
|
you wish to further customize your site.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>If you make modifications to your style sheet, you need
|
|
to be aware the regenerating the pages with the same output
|
|
directory will overwrite your changes to this file. To prevent
|
|
this from happening, make sure you choose <guilabel>No style
|
|
sheet</guilabel> for subsequent runs.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Character set encoding</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Because of GRAMPS internationalization ability, the
|
|
default character set for the HTML pages is UTF-8. This
|
|
provides support for virtually all characters.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The Apache web server is sometimes misconfigured to
|
|
override the character set specified in an HTML page. This
|
|
causes problems with the UTF-8 character set generated by
|
|
GRAMPS, distorting characters on the screen.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>If your web server is misconfigured and you do not have
|
|
priveledge to fix the configururation, you may solve this
|
|
problem by overriding the default character set to match what
|
|
your web server may be expecting.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Copyright notice</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>International copyright law reserves all rights to your
|
|
data. You own the data, and people must get your permission to
|
|
use it. In genealogy, however, sharing data is a common ideal.
|
|
It this case, you may wish to grant the user more
|
|
rights.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>While the default for GRAMPS is to place a notice
|
|
indicating that all rights are reserved, we give you the
|
|
option to place your site under one of several of the Create
|
|
Commons licenses. With a Creative Commons license, you grant
|
|
user's certain permission to use your data without requiring
|
|
them to contact you directly for permission.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>See the <ulink type="http"
|
|
url="http://creativecommons.org/">Creative Commons</ulink> web
|
|
site for more information.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Controlling page generation</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Three additional pages can be generated by the web page
|
|
generator. The Home page is a page that will display an image
|
|
and a whatever text you wish. To enable this page, choose a
|
|
Media Object from the <guilabel>Home Media/Note ID</guilabel>
|
|
menu on the <guilabel>Page Generation</guilabel> tab. If the
|
|
Media Object contains an image, the image is displayed at the
|
|
top of the page. If the Media Object contains a Note, the
|
|
Note's text is used for the text of the page. A second page,
|
|
the Introduction page, works similarly. Just choose the Media
|
|
Object in the <guilabel>Introduction Media/Note ID</guilabel>
|
|
menu.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>If you choose to include a contact page, the researcher
|
|
information stored in the database is displayed, along with
|
|
the information specified in the <guilabel>Publisher
|
|
contact/Note ID</guilabel> menu. Please use this page with
|
|
caution, since you may consider your contact information to be
|
|
private.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Privacy</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Privacy of personal information is an important issue on
|
|
the web today. GRAMPS tries to give you control over the
|
|
information that is presented.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>GRAMPS provides two options to control the privacy of
|
|
your information. If you select the <guilabel>Do not include
|
|
records marked private</guilabel> option, any data that is
|
|
marked as private will not be displayed on the generated site.
|
|
If you select <guilabel>Restrict information on living
|
|
people</guilabel>, GRAMPS will attempt to determine which
|
|
people have the potential of still being alive, and will omit
|
|
these people from the database. Some countries have laws that
|
|
indicate that a certain number of years must pass after
|
|
someone's death before information can be published. The
|
|
<guilabel>Years to restrict from person's death</guilabel>
|
|
option allows you to specifiy how many years a person must be
|
|
deceased before the information is included.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>Please note that it is your responsibility to double
|
|
check all information in the pages for any privacy
|
|
information. GRAMPS cannot be held responsible for any privacy
|
|
issues.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Adding custom code your pages</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>If you are not interested in customizing your pages, you
|
|
may skip the section.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The previous web generator allowed you to customize your
|
|
pages using HTML templates. Your data would be substituted for
|
|
certain markers in the code.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>This method proved to be too cumbersome for most users.
|
|
The Narrative Web Page Generator introduces a simpler
|
|
mechanism. On the <guilabel>Page Generation</guilabel> tab,
|
|
you may specify text (including HTML code) that will be
|
|
inserted into each page, separately for the header and the
|
|
footer.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>To create this code, you need to create a Media Object
|
|
marked as an internal note. To create this, add a new Media
|
|
Object in the Media View, and select the internal note option.
|
|
You may then enter your HTML code.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>To insert the code from the internal notes into the web
|
|
pages, select the appropriate Media Objects from the
|
|
<guilabel>HTML user header</guilabel> and <guilabel>HTML user
|
|
footer</guilabel> menus. Two div sections will be added to the
|
|
pages - userheader and userfooter. The corresponding HTML code
|
|
is inserted into the HTML page surrounded by div markers. You
|
|
can customize your style sheet to provide additional
|
|
formatting and positioning information to control these
|
|
sections.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="gramps-tools">
|
|
<title>Running Tools</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>GRAMPS tools allow you to perform various types of analysis of
|
|
your genealogical data. Typically, the tools do not produce output in
|
|
form of printouts or files. Instead, they produce screen output
|
|
immediately available for the researcher. However, when appropriate, you
|
|
can save the results of running a tool into a file. Tools present one of
|
|
the major strengths of GRAMPS compared to the most genealogical
|
|
software.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The tools can be accessed through the menu by choosing <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Tools</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guisubmenu><replaceable>Tool Section</replaceable></guisubmenu>
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem><replaceable>Particular
|
|
Tool</replaceable></guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>. Alternatively, you can browse the complete selection of
|
|
available tools along with their brief descriptions in a <guilabel>Tool
|
|
Selection</guilabel> dialog invoked by clicking the
|
|
<guibutton>Tools</guibutton> icon on the toolbar.</para>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="tools-ae">
|
|
<title>Analysis and Exploration</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>This section contains tools which analyze and explore the
|
|
database, but do not alter it. The following analysis and exploration
|
|
tools are currently available in GRAMPS:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Compare individual events</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This tool compares events across the selected group of
|
|
people. The people for this comparison are chosen with the use
|
|
of custom filters. The custom filters can be created in the
|
|
Custom Filter Editor (see <xref linkend="tools-util-cfe" />)
|
|
that can be invoked by clicking the <guilabel>Custom Filter
|
|
Editor</guilabel> button. The resulting table produced by this
|
|
tool can be saved as a spreadsheet.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Interactive descendant browser</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This tool builds a tree with the Active Person being the
|
|
root. Children branch from their parents in the usual manner.
|
|
Use this tool for a quick glance of a person's
|
|
descendants.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>Double-clicking on tree node will bring up the
|
|
<guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel> dialog allowing to view or
|
|
modify the personal data.</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="tools-db">
|
|
<title>Database Processing</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>This section contains tools which may modify your database. The
|
|
tools from this section are used mostly for finding and correcting
|
|
errors in the data. The following database processing tools are
|
|
currently available in GRAMPS:</para>
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>The modifications will only be performed upon your explicit
|
|
consent, except for the automatic fixes performed by <guilabel>Check
|
|
and repair database</guilabel> tool.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Check and repair database</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This tool checks the database for integrity problems,
|
|
fixing the problems it can. Specifically, the tool is checking
|
|
for:</para>
|
|
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Broken family links. These are the cases when a
|
|
person's record refers to a family while the family's record
|
|
does not refer to that person, and vice versa.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Missing media objects. The missing media object is the
|
|
object whose file is referenced in the database but does not
|
|
exist. This can happen when the file is accidentally
|
|
deleted, renamed, or moved to another location.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Empty families. These are the family entries which
|
|
have no reference to any person as their member.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Parent relationship. This checks all families to
|
|
ensure that father and mother are not mixed up. The check is
|
|
also made that parents have different gender. If they have
|
|
common gender then their relationship is renamed to
|
|
"Partners".</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Extract information from names</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This tool searches the entire database and attempts to
|
|
extract titles and nicknames that may be embedded in a person's
|
|
<guilabel>Given name</guilabel> field. If any information could
|
|
be extracted, the candidates for fixing will be presented in the
|
|
table. You may then decide which to repair as suggested and
|
|
which not to.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Find possible duplicate people</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This tool searches the entire database, looking for the
|
|
entries that may represent the same person.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Fix capitalization of family names</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This tool searches the entire database and attempts to fix
|
|
the capitalization of family names. The aim is to have
|
|
conventional capitalization: capital first letter and lower case
|
|
for the rest of the family name. If deviations from this rule
|
|
are detected, the candidates for fixing will be presented in the
|
|
table. You may then decide which to repair as suggested and
|
|
which not to.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Rename personal event types</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This tool allows all the events of a certain name to be
|
|
renamed to a new name.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Reorder GRAMPS IDs</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This tool reorders the GRAMPS IDs according to the
|
|
defaults of GRAMPS.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="tools-util">
|
|
<title>Utilities</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>This section contains tools allowing you to perform a simple
|
|
operation on a portion of data. The results can be saved in your
|
|
database, but they will not modify your existing data. The following
|
|
utilities are currently available in GRAMPS:</para>
|
|
|
|
<sect3 id="tools-util-cfe">
|
|
<title>Custom Filter Editor</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>The Custom Filter Editor builds custom filters that can be
|
|
used to select people included in reports, exports, and other tools
|
|
and utilities. This is in fact a very powerful tool in genealogical
|
|
analysis.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>When you launch it, the <guilabel>User defined
|
|
filters</guilabel> dialog appears that lists all the filters (if
|
|
any) previously defined by you. Click the
|
|
<guibutton>Add...</guibutton> button to define a new filter. Once
|
|
you have designed your filters, you can edit, test, and delete
|
|
selected filters using the <guibutton>Edit...</guibutton>,
|
|
<guibutton>Test...</guibutton>, and <guibutton>Delete</guibutton>
|
|
buttons, respectively. All the filters displayed in the list will be
|
|
automatically saved along with your database and will be available
|
|
with subsequent sessions of GRAMPS.</para>
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>The changes made to the filters only take effect when you
|
|
click the <guibutton>Apply and close</guibutton> button.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<para>Clicking the <guibutton>Add...</guibutton> button invokes the
|
|
following <guilabel>Define filter</guilabel> dialog:</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="cfe-df-fig">
|
|
<title>Define filter dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/cfe-df.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Define filter dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>Type the name for your new filter into the
|
|
<guilabel>Name</guilabel> field. Enter any comment that would help
|
|
you identify this filter in the future into the
|
|
<guilabel>Comment</guilabel> field. Add as many rules to the
|
|
<guilabel>Rule list</guilabel> as you would like to your filter
|
|
using <guibutton>Add...</guibutton> button. If the filter has more
|
|
than one rule, select one of the <guilabel>Rule
|
|
operations</guilabel>. This allows you to choose whether all rules
|
|
must apply, only one (either) rule must apply, or exactly one
|
|
(either) rule must apply, in order for the filter to generate a
|
|
match. If your filter has only one rule, this selection has no
|
|
effect.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>Check <guilabel>Return values that do not match the filter
|
|
rules</guilabel> to invert the filter rule. For example, inverting
|
|
"has a common ancestor with I1" rule will match everyone who does
|
|
not have a common ancestor with that person).</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>Clicking the <guibutton>Add...</guibutton> button invokes the
|
|
following <guilabel>Add Rule</guilabel> dialog:</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="cfe-ar-fig">
|
|
<title>Add Rule dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/cfe-ar.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Add Rule dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>The pane on the left-hand side displays available filter rules
|
|
arranged by their categories in an expandable tree. For detailed
|
|
filter rule reference, see <xref linkend="append-filtref" />. Click
|
|
on the arrows to fold/unfold the appropriate category. Select the
|
|
rule from the tree by clicking on its name. The right-hand side
|
|
displays the name, the description, and the values for the currently
|
|
selected rule. Once you are satisfied with your rule selection and
|
|
its values, click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to add this rule to the
|
|
rule list of the currently edited filter. Clicking
|
|
<guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> will abort adding the rule to the
|
|
filter.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>A filter you have already designed may be used as a rule for
|
|
another filter. This gives you nearly infinite flexibility in
|
|
custom-tailoring your selection criteria that can be later used in
|
|
most of the exports, reports, and some of the tools (such as
|
|
comparing individual events).</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
|
|
<sect3 id="tools-util-scratch-pad">
|
|
<title>Scratch Pad</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>This tool provides a temporary note pad to store database
|
|
records for easy reuse. In short, this is a sort of the
|
|
copy-and-paste functionality extended from textual objects to other
|
|
types of records used in GRAMPS.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>Scratch Pad makes extensive use of drag-and-drop
|
|
technique.</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<para>To invoke Scratch Pad, either choose <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Tools</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guisubmenu>Utilities</guisubmenu>
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Scratch Pad</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice> or click the <guilabel>ScratchPad</guilabel> button
|
|
on the toolbar. The following window will appear:</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="scratch-pad-fig">
|
|
<title>Scratch Pad tool</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/scratch-pad.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Add Scratch Pad tool.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>Scratch Pad supports addresses, attributes (both personal and
|
|
family), events (both personal and family), names, media objects
|
|
references, source references, URLs, and of course textual
|
|
information of notes and comments. To store any type of these
|
|
records, simply drag the existing record on to the Scratch Pad from
|
|
the corresponding editor dialog. To reuse the record, drag it from
|
|
the Scratch Pad on to the corresponding place in the editor, e.g.
|
|
Address tab, Attribute tab, etc.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>Some objects are showing the link icon on the left. This
|
|
indicates that dragging such selection will produce a reference to
|
|
an existing object, not copy the object itself.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>For example, the media object file will not be duplicated.
|
|
Instead, the reference will be made to an existing media object,
|
|
which will result in the local gallery entry.</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>Scratch Pad storage is persistent within a single GRAMPS
|
|
session. Closing the window will not lose the stored records.
|
|
However, exiting GRAMPS will.</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
|
|
<sect3 id="tools-util-other">
|
|
<title>Other tools</title>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Generate SoundEx codes</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This utility generates SoundEx codes for the names of
|
|
people in the database. Please visit the <ulink type="http"
|
|
url="http://www.archives.gov/research_room/genealogy/census/soundex.html">NARA
|
|
Soundex Indexing page</ulink> to learn more about Soundex
|
|
Indexing System.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Relationship calculator</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This utility calculates and displays the relationship of
|
|
any person to the Active Person.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Verify the database</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This utility allows you to verify the database based on
|
|
the set of criteria specified by you.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<title>Difference between Verify tool and previously
|
|
described Check tool</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>The Check tool detects inconsistencies in the database
|
|
structure. The Verify tool, however, is detecting the
|
|
records that do not satisfy your particular criteria.</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<para>For example, you may want to make sure that nobody in
|
|
your database had children at the age of 98. Based on common
|
|
sense, such a record would indicate an error. However, it is
|
|
not a consistency error in the database. Besides, someone
|
|
might have a child at the age of 98 (although this rarely
|
|
happens). The Verify tool will display everything that
|
|
violates your criteria so that you can check whether the
|
|
record is erroneous or not. The ultimate decision is
|
|
yours.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
</chapter>
|
|
|
|
<chapter id="gramps-settings">
|
|
<title>Settings</title>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="gramps-prefs">
|
|
<title>Preferences</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Most of the settings in GRAMPS, are configured in the
|
|
<guilabel>Preferences</guilabel> dialog. To invoke it, choose
|
|
<menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Preferences...</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>.</para>
|
|
|
|
<figure id="prefs-fig">
|
|
<title>Preferences dialog</title>
|
|
|
|
<screenshot>
|
|
<mediaobject>
|
|
<imageobject>
|
|
<imagedata fileref="figures/prefs.png" format="PNG" />
|
|
</imageobject>
|
|
<textobject>
|
|
<phrase>Shows Preferences dialog.</phrase>
|
|
</textobject>
|
|
</mediaobject>
|
|
</screenshot>
|
|
</figure>
|
|
|
|
<para>The tabs on the top display the available option
|
|
categories.</para>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-prefs-db">
|
|
<title>General</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>This category contains preferences relevant to the general
|
|
operation of the program. Options are:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Automatically load last
|
|
database</guilabel></term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Check this box to automatically load the last open
|
|
database on startup.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Add default source on import</guilabel></term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This option affects the importing of data. If this is
|
|
set, each item that is imported will contain a source reference
|
|
to the imported file.</para>
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>Adding a default source can significantly slow down
|
|
the importing your data.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Enable spelling checker</guilabel></term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This option controls the enabling and disabling of
|
|
the spelling checker for notes. The gtkspell package must
|
|
be loaded for this to have an effect.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Display Tip of the Day</guilabel></term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This option controls the enabling and disabling of
|
|
the Tip of the Day dialog at startup.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Use shading in Relationship View</guilabel></term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This option controls the enabling and disabling of
|
|
shading in the Relationship View. If enabled, information
|
|
will be grouped together in regions with a shaded background.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Enable database transactions</guilabel></term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This option controls the enabling and disabling of
|
|
transactions during database operations.
|
|
</para>
|
|
<warning>
|
|
<para>Care must be taken with selecting this option. By default,
|
|
transactions are enabled. This improves database performance
|
|
and protects database integrity. However, if your system is using
|
|
a version of the Python language prior to version 2.5, your
|
|
database will not be portable to other machines, and if you want
|
|
to transfer your data to another machine, you will need to export
|
|
using the GRAMPS XML format. Disabling this option will allow
|
|
databases to be portable, but at a risk of database integrity
|
|
problems.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</warning>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-prefs-display">
|
|
<title>Display</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>This category contains preferences relevant to the display of
|
|
data. Options are:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term><guilabel>Date format</guilabel></term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
This option controls the display of dates. Several different
|
|
formats are available, which may be dependent on your locale.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term><guilabel>Surname Guessing</guilabel></term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
This option affects the initial family name of a
|
|
child when he/she is added to the database.
|
|
</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>
|
|
This option only affects the initial family name guessed
|
|
by GRAMPS when the <guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel> dialog
|
|
is launched. You can modify that name the way you see fit.
|
|
Set this option to the value that you will most frequently
|
|
use, as it will save you a lot of typing.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
If <guilabel>None</guilabel> is selected, no guessing will be
|
|
attempted. Selecting <guilabel>Father's surname</guilabel>
|
|
will use the family name of the father. Selecting
|
|
<guilabel>Combination of mother's and father's surname</guilabel>
|
|
will use the father's name followed by the mother's name.
|
|
Finally, <guilabel>Icelandic style</guilabel> will use the
|
|
father's given name followed by the "sson" suffix
|
|
(e.g. the son of Edwin will be guessed as Edwinsson).
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term><guilabel>Status bar</guilabel></term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
This option controls the information displayed in the
|
|
status bar. This can be either the Active Person's name
|
|
and GRAMPS ID or Active Person's relationship to the Home
|
|
person.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry><term><guilabel>Show text in sidebar buttons</guilabel></term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
This option controls whether or not a text description is
|
|
displayed next to the icon in the sidebar. This option takes
|
|
effect after the program has been restarted.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-prefs-name">
|
|
<title>Name Display</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>This category contains preferences relevant to the display of
|
|
names. In GRAMPS there are two type of name display formats: the
|
|
predefined formats, and the user defined custom formats. The predefined
|
|
formats are:</para>
|
|
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Family name, Given name Patronymic</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Given name Family name</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Patronymic, Given name</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Given name</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
|
|
<para>When predefined formats are not suitable one can define it's own format.</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Display format</guilabel></term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The system wide name format is selected here from a list, which
|
|
contains both the predefined and custom name formats (if any).
|
|
</para>
|
|
<note id="name-displ-format-note">
|
|
<para>Besides the system wide setting GRAMPS allows deciding
|
|
the name display format individually for every single name via
|
|
the <guilabel>Name Editor</guilabel> dialog
|
|
(see <xref linkend="adv-an" />).</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Custom format details</guilabel></term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
It expands the custom format handling user interface.
|
|
</para>
|
|
<note id="cust-name-note">
|
|
<para>Custom name display formats are stored in the databases,
|
|
thus before loading any database the <guilabel>Custom format
|
|
details</guilabel> expander is disabled.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Add</guilabel></term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Opens the <guilabel>Name Format Editor</guilabel>
|
|
window to define a new custom format.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Remove</guilabel></term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Deletes the selected custom Name Display format.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Edit</guilabel></term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Opens the <guilabel>Name Format Editor</guilabel>
|
|
window to modify the selected custom Name Display format.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<sect3 id="name-format-editor">
|
|
<title>Name Format Editor</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>New formats are created, and existing formats are modified using
|
|
this editor.</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Format name</guilabel></term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The name of the custom format. The format name can be any
|
|
string, it is used only to recognize the format later on the
|
|
<guilabel>Display format</guilabel> list.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Format definition</guilabel></term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
The actual format is defined here using special formatting
|
|
characters. Before and after these special characters any
|
|
other character or string is allowed. For exmple: <userinput>
|
|
"(%t) %L, %f"</userinput> will give <replaceable>"(Dr.) SMITH,
|
|
Edwin"</replaceable>. The formatting characters are:
|
|
</para>
|
|
<informaltable frame="all">
|
|
<tgroup cols="4">
|
|
<thead>
|
|
<row>
|
|
<entry><emphasis>Character</emphasis></entry>
|
|
<entry><emphasis>Name</emphasis></entry>
|
|
<entry><emphasis>Character</emphasis></entry>
|
|
<entry><emphasis>Name</emphasis></entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
</thead>
|
|
<tbody>
|
|
<row>
|
|
<entry>%f</entry><entry>Given Name</entry><entry>%F</entry><entry>GIVEN NAME</entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
<row>
|
|
<entry>%l</entry><entry>Surname</entry><entry>%L</entry><entry>SURNAME</entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
<row>
|
|
<entry>%t</entry><entry>Title</entry><entry>%T</entry><entry>TITLE</entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
<row>
|
|
<entry>%p</entry><entry>Prefix</entry><entry>%P</entry><entry>PREFIX</entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
<row>
|
|
<entry>%s</entry><entry>Suffix</entry><entry>%S</entry><entry>SUFFIX</entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
<row>
|
|
<entry>%c</entry><entry>Call name</entry><entry>%C</entry><entry>CALL NAME</entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
<row>
|
|
<entry>%y</entry><entry>Patronymic</entry><entry>%Y</entry><entry>PATRONYMIC</entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
</tbody>
|
|
</tgroup>
|
|
</informaltable>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Example</guilabel></term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Shows a dynamic example how the name will be displayed with
|
|
the current <guilabel>Format definition</guilabel> string.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Format definition details</guilabel></term>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Shows a quick reminder of the special formatting characters.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect3>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-prefs-id-formats">
|
|
<title>ID Formats</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>This category contains preferences relevant to the automatic
|
|
generation of GRAMPS IDs.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>The ID prefixes use formatting conventions common for C,
|
|
Python, and other programming languages. For example, the %04d
|
|
expands to an integer, prepended with zeros to have the total
|
|
width of four digits. If you would like IDs to be 1, 2, 3,
|
|
etc, simply set the formatting parameter to %d.</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Person</guilabel></term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Provides the template for generating IDs for a Person.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Family</guilabel></term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Provides the template for generating IDs for a Family.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Place</guilabel></term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Provides the template for generating IDs for a Place.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Source</guilabel></term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Provides the template for generating IDs for a Source.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Media Object</guilabel></term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Provides the template for generating IDs for a Media Object.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Event</guilabel></term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Provides the template for generating IDs for an Event.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term><guilabel>Repository</guilabel></term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>
|
|
Provides the template for generating IDs for a Repository.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-prefs-warnings">
|
|
<title>Warnings</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>
|
|
This category controls the display of warning dialogs, allowing
|
|
the re-enabling of dialogs that have been disabled.
|
|
</para>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-prefs-researcher">
|
|
<title>Researcher Information</title>
|
|
<para>Enter your personal information in the corresponding text
|
|
entry fields. Although GRAMPS requests information about you,
|
|
this information is used only so that GRAMPS can create valid
|
|
GEDCOM output files. A valid GEDCOM file requires information
|
|
about the file's creator. If you choose, you may leave the
|
|
information empty, however none of your exported GEDCOM files
|
|
will be valid.</para>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="gramps-prefs-markers">
|
|
<title>Marker Colors</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>This category controls the highlight color of items in the
|
|
Person list when a marker has been set for a person.</para>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="gramps-prefs-other">
|
|
<title>Other settings</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Besides <guilabel>Preferences</guilabel> dialog, there are other
|
|
settings available in GRAMPS. For various reasons they have been made
|
|
more readily accessible, as listed below.</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Column Editor</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The columns of the list views may be added, removed, or
|
|
reordered in a <guilabel>Column Editor Dialog</guilabel>, see
|
|
<xref linkend="column-editor-fig" />. Only checked columns will be
|
|
shown in the view. To change their order, drag any column to its
|
|
desired place inside the editor. Clicking
|
|
<guibutton>OK</guibutton> will reflect the changes in the
|
|
appropriate view. To invoke <guilabel>Column Editor
|
|
Dialog</guilabel>, choose <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Column Editor...</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>The <guilabel>Column Editor</guilabel> is available and
|
|
works in the same way for all list views. Specifically, it is
|
|
available for People View, Family View (children list). Sources
|
|
View, Places View, and Media View.</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Setting Home person</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The Home person is the person who becomes active when
|
|
database opened, when <guibutton>Home</guibutton> button is
|
|
clicked or the <guimenuitem>Home</guimenuitem> menu item is
|
|
selected from either <guimenu>Go</guimenu> menu or the right-click
|
|
context menu anywhere.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>To set Home person, make the desired person active and then
|
|
choose <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Set Home person...</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Adjusting viewing controls</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Whether the toolbar, the sidebar, or the filter (People View
|
|
only) are displayed in the main window is adjusted through the
|
|
<guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="gramps-prefs-adv">
|
|
<title>Advanced manipulation of settings</title>
|
|
|
|
<warning>
|
|
<para>The contents of this section is outside the scope of interest of
|
|
a general user of GRAMPS. If you proceed with tweaking the options on
|
|
the low level you may damage your GRAMPS installation. Be careful. YOU
|
|
HAVE BEEN WARNED!</para>
|
|
</warning>
|
|
|
|
<para>By default, GRAMPS stores its settings using gconf2 system. All
|
|
the settings used in this version of GRAMPS are stored in subdirectories
|
|
under <filename>/apps/gramps/</filename> in the gconf2 namespace.
|
|
Accessing the keys can be done either using
|
|
<command>gconftool-2</command> command line tool, or the
|
|
<command>gconf-editor</command> GUI tool.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>All keys are documented, and the notification mechanisms are used
|
|
as appropriate. Therefore, updating keys from outside of GRAMPS should
|
|
lead to updating GRAMPS in real time, without necessarily restarting
|
|
it.</para>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
</chapter>
|
|
|
|
<appendix id="faq">
|
|
<title>Frequently Asked Questions</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>This appendix contains the list of questions that frequently come up
|
|
in mailing list discussions and forums. This list is by no means complete.
|
|
If you would like to add questions/answers to this list, please email your
|
|
suggestions to <ulink type="mailto"
|
|
url="mailto:gramps-devel@lists.sf.net">gramps-devel@lists.sf.net</ulink></para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>What is GRAMPS?</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>GRAMPS is the Genealogical Research and Analysis Management
|
|
Program System. In other words, it is a personal genealogy program
|
|
letting you store, edit, and research genealogical data using the
|
|
powers of your computer.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Where do I get it and how much does it cost?</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>GRAMPS can be downloaded from <ulink type="http"
|
|
url="http://sf.net/projects/gramps">http://sf.net/projects/gramps</ulink>
|
|
at no charge. GRAMPS is an Open Source project covered by the GNU
|
|
General Public License. You have full access to the source code and
|
|
are allowed to distribute the program and source code freely.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Does it work with Windows (tm)?</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>No. GRAMPS uses the GTK and GNOME libraries. While the GTK
|
|
libraries have been ported to Windows, the GNOME libraries have not.
|
|
This, however, may change in the future.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Does it work with the Mac?</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para><ulink type="http" url="http://fink.sourceforge.net"> The Fink
|
|
project</ulink> has ported <ulink type="http"
|
|
url="http://fink.sourceforge.net/pdb/package.php/gramps"> some older
|
|
versions</ulink> of GRAMPS to OSX (tm). The Mac OSX port is not
|
|
directly supported by the GRAMPS project, primarily because none of
|
|
the GRAMPS developers have access to Mac OSX and because OSX is not
|
|
Free Software.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>This version of GRAMPS (2.2.0) does not appear to have been
|
|
ported by the Fink project. Please contact the Fink project for more
|
|
information.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>Some people have had success using the DarwinPorts instead of
|
|
the Fink project.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Does it work with KDE?</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Yes, as long as the required GNOME libraries are
|
|
installed.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Do I really have to have GNOME installed?</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Yes, but you do not have to be running the GNOME
|
|
desktop.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>What version of GNOME do I need?</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This version of gramps requires GNOME 2.8.0 or higher.
|
|
Previous versions in 1.0.x series required GNOME 2.0.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Is GRAMPS compatible with other genealogical software?</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>GRAMPS makes every effort to maintain compatibility with
|
|
GEDCOM, the general standard of recording genealogical information.
|
|
We have import and export filters that enable GRAMPS to read and
|
|
write GEDCOM files.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>It is important to understand that the GEDCOM standard is
|
|
poorly implemented -- virtually every genealogical software has its
|
|
own "flavor" of GEDCOM. As we learn about new flavor, the
|
|
import/export filters can be created very quickly. However, finding
|
|
out about the unknown flavors requires user feedback. Please feel
|
|
free to inform us about any GEDCOM flavor not supported by GRAMPS,
|
|
and we will do our best to support it!</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Can GRAMPS read files created by other genealogy
|
|
programs?</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>See above.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Can GRAMPS write files readable by other genealogy
|
|
programs?</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>See above.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Can GRAMPS print a genealogical tree for my family?</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Yes. Different people have different ideas of what a
|
|
genealogical tree is. Some think of it as a chart going from the
|
|
distant ancestor and listing all his/her descendants and their
|
|
families. Others think it should be a chart going from the person
|
|
back in time, listing the ancestors and their families. Yet other
|
|
people think of a table, text report, etc.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>GRAMPS can produce any of the above, and many more different
|
|
charts and reports. Moreover, the plugin architecture enables users
|
|
(you) to create their own plugins which could be new reports,
|
|
charts, or research tools.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>In what formats can GRAMPS output its reports?</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Text reports are available in HTML, PDF, AbiWord, KWord,
|
|
LaTeX, RTF, and OpenOffice formats. Graphical reports (charts and
|
|
diagrams) are available in PostScript, PDF, SVG, OpenOffice, and
|
|
GraphViz formats.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Is GRAMPS compatible with the Internet?</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>GRAMPS can store web addresses and direct your browser to
|
|
them. It can import data that you download from the Internet. It can
|
|
export data that you could send over the Internet. GRAMPS is
|
|
familiar with the standard file formats widely used on the Internet
|
|
(e.g. JPEG, PNG, and GIF images, MP3, OGG, and WAV sound files,
|
|
QuickTime, MPEG, and AVI movie files, etc). Other than that, there
|
|
is little that a genealogical program can do with the
|
|
Internet.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Can I create custom reports/filters/whatever?</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Yes. There are many levels of customization. One is creating
|
|
or modifying the templates used for the reports. This gives you some
|
|
control over the fonts, colors, and some layout of the reports. You
|
|
can also use GRAMPS controls in the report dialogs to tell what
|
|
contents should be used for a particular report. In addition to
|
|
this, you have an ability to create your own filters -- this is
|
|
useful in selecting people based on criteria set by you. You can
|
|
combine these filters to create new, more complex filters. Finally,
|
|
you have an option to create your own plugins. These may be new
|
|
reports, research tools, import/export filters, etc. This assumes
|
|
some knowledge of programming in Python.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>What standards does GRAMPS support?</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The nice thing about standards is that there never is a
|
|
shortage of them. GRAMPS is tested to support the following flavors
|
|
of GEDCOM: GEDCOM5.5, Brother's Keeper, Family Origins, Family Tree
|
|
Maker, Ftree, GeneWeb, Legacy, Personal Ancestral File, Pro-Gen,
|
|
Reunion, and Visual Genealogie.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>What is the maximum database size (bytes) GRAMPS can
|
|
handle?</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>GRAMPS has no hard limits on the size of a database that it
|
|
can handle. Starting with this release, GRAMPS no longer loads all
|
|
data into memory, which allows it to work with a much larger
|
|
database than before. In reality, however, there are practical
|
|
limits. The main limiting factors are the available memory on the
|
|
system and the cache size used for BSDDB database access. With
|
|
common memory sizes these days, GRAMPS should have no problem using
|
|
databases with tens of thousands of people.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>How many people can GRAMPS database handle?</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>We have found that on a typical system, GRAMPS tends to bog
|
|
down after the database has around 150,000 people. Again, this is
|
|
dependent on how much memory you have.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Why is GRAMPS running so slowly?</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>It does not anymore! Just try out the current version,
|
|
2.2.0.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>My database is really big. Is there a way around loading all the
|
|
data into memory?</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Starting with this release, GRAMPS no longer loads all data
|
|
into memory, which allows it to work with a much larger database
|
|
than before.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>I want to rerun the Startup dialog. How do I do this?</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>GRAMPS keeps a flag in the GNOME configuration database to
|
|
indicate that the startup dialog has been run. To cause GRAMPS to
|
|
rerun this, the flag needs to be reset. This can be done with the
|
|
following command:</para>
|
|
|
|
<para><command>gconftool-2 -u
|
|
/apps/gramps/behavior/startup</command></para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Why are non-latin characters displayed as garbage in PDF/PS
|
|
reports?</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This is a limitation of the builtin fonts of PS and PDF
|
|
formats. To print non-latin text, use the Print... in the format
|
|
selection menu of the report dialog. This will use the gnome-print
|
|
backend, which supports PS and PDF creation, as well as direct
|
|
printing.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>If you only have latin text, the PDF option will produce a
|
|
smalled PDF compared to that created by gnome-print, simply because
|
|
no font information will be embedded.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Why can I not add/remove/edit columns to the lists in People
|
|
View and Family View?</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Now you can! Just try out the current version, 2.2.0.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>I would like to contribute to GRAMPS by writing my favorite
|
|
report. How do I do that?</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The easiest way to contribute to reports, filters, tools, etc.
|
|
is to copy an existing GRAMPS report, filter, or tool. If you can
|
|
create what you want by modifying existing code -- great! If your
|
|
idea does not fit into the logic of any existing GRAMPS tool, the
|
|
<ulink type="http"
|
|
url="http://gramps.sourceforge.net/phpwiki/index.php/GrampsDevelopersPage">following
|
|
page</ulink> may provide some help in writing your own plugin from
|
|
scratch.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>If you need more help or would like to discuss your idea with
|
|
us, please do not hesitate to contact us at <ulink type="mailto"
|
|
url="mailto:gramps-devel@lists.sf.net">gramps-devel@lists.sf.net</ulink></para>
|
|
|
|
<para>To test your work in progress, you may save your plugin under
|
|
<replaceable>$HOME/.gramps/plugins</replaceable> directory and it
|
|
should be found and imported on startup. The correctly written
|
|
plugin will register itself with GRAMPS, create menu item, and so
|
|
on.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>If you are happy with your plugin and would like to contribute
|
|
your code back to the GRAMPS project, you are very welcome to do so
|
|
by contacting us at <ulink type="mailto"
|
|
url="mailto:gramps-devel@lists.sf.net">gramps-devel@lists.sf.net</ulink></para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>I found a bug and I want it fixed right now! What do I
|
|
do?</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The best thing you can do is to fix the bug and send the patch
|
|
to <ulink type="mailto"
|
|
url="mailto:gramps-devel@lists.sf.net">gramps-devel@lists.sf.net</ulink>
|
|
:-)</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>A good bug report would include:</para>
|
|
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Version of gramps you were using when you encountered the
|
|
bug (available through <menuchoice>
|
|
<guisubmenu>Help</guisubmenu>
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>About</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice> menu item).</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Language under which gramps was run (available by
|
|
executing</para>
|
|
|
|
<para><command>echo $LANG</command></para>
|
|
|
|
<para>in your terminal).</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Symptoms indicating that this is indeed a bug.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Any Traceback messages, error messages, warnings, etc,
|
|
that showed up in your terminal or a in separate traceback
|
|
window.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
|
|
<para>Most problems can be fixed quickly provided there is enough
|
|
information. To ensure this, please follow up on your bug reports.
|
|
In particular, if you file a bug report with sf.net bug tracker,
|
|
PLEASE log in to sf.net before filing (register your free account if
|
|
you don't have one). Then we will have a way of contacting you
|
|
should we need more information. If you choose to file your report
|
|
anonymously, at least check every so often whether your report page
|
|
has something new posted, as it probably would.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>If the above explanations seem vague, please follow <ulink
|
|
type="http"
|
|
url="http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/bugs.html">this
|
|
link.</ulink></para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>It is obvious that GRAMPS absolutely needs to become a
|
|
(client-server/web-based/PHP/weblog/Javascript/C++/distributed/KDE/Motif/Tcl/Win32/C#/You-name-it)
|
|
application. When is this going to happen?</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The surest way to see it happen is to get it done by yourself.
|
|
Since GRAMPS is free/open source, nobody prevents you from taking
|
|
all of the code and continuing its development in whatever direction
|
|
you see fit. In doing so, you may consider giving your new project
|
|
another name to avoid confusion with the continuing GRAMPS
|
|
development. If you would like the GRAMPS project to provide advice,
|
|
expertise, filters, etc., we will gladly cooperate with your new
|
|
project, to ensure compatibility or import/export options to your
|
|
new format of a project.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>If, however, you would like the GRAMPS project to to adopt
|
|
your strategy, you would need to convince GRAMPS developers that
|
|
your strategy is good for GRAMPS and superior to the present
|
|
development strategy.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</appendix>
|
|
|
|
<appendix id="append-keybind">
|
|
<title>Keybindings reference</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>Most of the standard menu items define equivalent keybindings. These
|
|
are apparent because they are displayed on the right of the menu item.
|
|
However, some keybindings are not associated with any items in the
|
|
menu.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>This appendix contains the list of keybindings that are not
|
|
displayed in menus of GRAMPS.</para>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="keybind-lists">
|
|
<title>List Views</title>
|
|
|
|
<sect2>
|
|
<title>Common bindings</title>
|
|
<para>The following bindings are available in all list views: People
|
|
View, Sources View, Places View, and Media View.</para>
|
|
|
|
<informaltable frame="topbot">
|
|
<tgroup cols="2">
|
|
<colspec colname="col1" />
|
|
<colspec colname="col2" />
|
|
<thead>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry colname="col1" colsep="0"
|
|
valign="top"><para>Key</para></entry>
|
|
|
|
<entry colname="col2" valign="top"><para>Function</para></entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
</thead>
|
|
|
|
<tbody>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry><para><keycap><Alt>N</keycap></para></entry>
|
|
<entry>Changes the view to the next view</entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry><para><keycap><Alt>P</keycap></para></entry>
|
|
<entry>Changes the view to the previous view</entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry><para><keycap><Alt>S</keycap></para></entry>
|
|
<entry>Open the Scratch Pad</entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry><para><keycap><Ctrl>B</keycap></para></entry>
|
|
<entry>Edit the bookmarks</entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry><para><keycap><Ctrl>D</keycap></para></entry>
|
|
<entry>Add the selected item as a bookmark</entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry><para><keycap><Ctrl>H</keycap></para></entry>
|
|
<entry>Open the Undo History dialog</entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
</tbody>
|
|
</tgroup>
|
|
</informaltable>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
<sect2>
|
|
<title>People View bindings</title>
|
|
<informaltable frame="topbot">
|
|
<tgroup cols="2">
|
|
<colspec colname="col1" />
|
|
<colspec colname="col2" />
|
|
<thead>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry colname="col1" colsep="0"
|
|
valign="top"><para>Key</para></entry>
|
|
<entry colname="col2" valign="top"><para>Function</para></entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
</thead>
|
|
|
|
<tbody>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry><para><keycap><Ctrl>Enter</keycap></para></entry>
|
|
<entry>Edits the selected person</entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry><para><keycap><Ctrl>Insert</keycap></para></entry>
|
|
<entry>Adds a new person to the database</entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
<row valign="top">
|
|
<entry><para><keycap><Ctrl>Delete</keycap></para></entry>
|
|
<entry>Deletes the selected person</entry>
|
|
</row>
|
|
</tbody>
|
|
</tgroup>
|
|
</informaltable>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
</appendix>
|
|
|
|
<appendix id="append-filtref">
|
|
<title>Filter rules reference</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>This appendix lists of all the filter rules currently defined in
|
|
GRAMPS. Each of these rules is available for use when creating custom
|
|
filters, see <xref linkend="tools-util-cfe" />. The rules are listed by
|
|
their categories.</para>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="filtref-general">
|
|
<title>General filters</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>This category includes the following most general rules:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Has complete record</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches all people whose records are marked as
|
|
complete. Currently, the completeness of personal information is
|
|
marked manually, in the <guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel>
|
|
dialog.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>People with incomplete names</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches all people with either given name or
|
|
family name missing.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Is bookmarked person</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches all people who are on the bookmark
|
|
list.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Has text matching substring of</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches all people whose records contain specified
|
|
substring. All textual records are searched. Optionally, the
|
|
search can be made case sensitive, or a regular expression
|
|
match.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Everyone</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches any person in the database. As such it is
|
|
not very useful on its own except for testing purposes. However,
|
|
it may be useful in combinations with other rules.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>People probably alive</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches all people whose records do not indicate
|
|
their death and who are not unreasonably old, judging by their
|
|
available birth data and today's date.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Has a name</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches any person whose name matches the
|
|
specified value in full or in part. For example, Marta Ericsdotter
|
|
will be matched by the rule using the value "eric" for the family
|
|
name.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>Separate values can be used for Given name, Family name,
|
|
Suffix, and the Title. The rule returns a match if, and only if,
|
|
all non-empty values are (partially) matched by a person's name.
|
|
To use just one value, leave the other values empty.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Has the Id</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches any person with a specified GRAMPS ID. The
|
|
rule returns a match only if the ID is matched exactly.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>You can either enter the ID into a text entry field, or
|
|
select a person from the list by clicking
|
|
<guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button. In the latter case, the
|
|
ID will appear in the text field after the selection was
|
|
made.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Is default person</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches the default (home) person.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>People marked private</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people whose records are marked as
|
|
private.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Is a female</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches any female person.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>People who have images</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people with images in their
|
|
galleries.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>People without a birth date</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people missing birth date.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Is a male</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches any male person.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="filtref-event">
|
|
<title>Event filters</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>This category includes the following rules that match people based
|
|
on their recorded events:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Has the birth</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people whose birth event matches specified
|
|
values for Date, Place, and Description. The rule returns a match
|
|
even if the person's birth event matches the value partially. The
|
|
matching rules are case-insensitive. For example, anyone born in
|
|
Sweden will be matched by the rule using the value "sw" for the
|
|
Place.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The rule returns a match if, and only if, all non-empty
|
|
values are (partially) matched by a person's birth. To use just
|
|
one value, leave the other values empty.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Has the death</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people whose death event matches specified
|
|
values for Date, Place, and Description. The rule returns a match
|
|
even if the person's death event matches the value partially. The
|
|
matching rules are case-insensitive. For example, anyone who died
|
|
in Sweden will be matched by the rule using the value "sw" for the
|
|
Place.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The rule returns a match if, and only if, all non-empty
|
|
values are (partially) matched by a person's death. To use just
|
|
one value, leave the other values empty.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Has source of</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people whose records refer to the
|
|
specified source.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Has the personal event</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people that have a personal event matching
|
|
specified values for the Event type, Date, Place, and Description.
|
|
The rule returns a match even if the person's event matches the
|
|
value partially. The matching rules are case-insensitive. For
|
|
example, anyone who graduated in Sweden will be matched by the
|
|
rule using the Graduation event and the value "sw" for the
|
|
Place.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The personal events should be selected from a pull-down
|
|
menu. The rule returns a match if, and only if, all non-empty
|
|
values are (partially) matched by the personal event. To use just
|
|
one value, leave the other values empty.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Has the family event</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people that have a family event matching
|
|
specified values for the Event type, Date, Place, and Description.
|
|
The rule returns a match even if the person's event matches the
|
|
value partially. The matching rules are case-insensitive. For
|
|
example, anyone who was married in Sweden will be matched by the
|
|
rule using the Marriage event and the value "sw" for the
|
|
Place.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The family events should be selected from a pull-down menu.
|
|
The rule returns a match if, and only if, all non-empty values are
|
|
(partially) matched by the personal event. To use just one value,
|
|
leave the other values empty.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Witness</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people who are present as a witness in the
|
|
event. If the personal or family event type is specified, only the
|
|
events of this type will be searched.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>People with incomplete events</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people missing date or place in any
|
|
personal event.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Families with incomplete events</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people missing date or place in any family
|
|
event of any of their families.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="filtref-family">
|
|
<title>Family filters</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>This category includes the following rules that match people based
|
|
on their family relationships:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>People with children</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people with children.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>People with multiple marriage records</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people with more than one spouse.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>People with no marriage records</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people with no spouses.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>People who were adopted</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches adopted people.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Has the relationships</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people with a particular relationship. The
|
|
relationship must match the type selected from the menu.
|
|
Optionally, the number of relationships and the number of children
|
|
can be specified.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The rule returns a match if, and only if, all non-empty
|
|
values are (partially) matched by a person's relationship. To use
|
|
just one value, leave the other values empty.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Is spouse of filter match</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people married to someone who is matched
|
|
by the specified filter. The specified filter name should be
|
|
selected from the menu.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Is a child of filter match</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people for whom either parent is matched
|
|
by the specified filter. The specified filter name should be
|
|
selected from the menu.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Is a parent of filter match</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people whose child is matched by the
|
|
specified filter. The specified filter name should be selected
|
|
from the menu.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Is a sibling of filter match</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people whose sibling is matched by the
|
|
specified filter. The specified filter name should be selected
|
|
from the menu.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="filtref-ancestral">
|
|
<title>Ancestral filters</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>This category includes the following rules that match people based
|
|
on their ancestral relations to other people:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Is an ancestor of</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people who are ancestors of the specified
|
|
person. The Inclusive option determines whether the specified
|
|
person should be considered his/her own ancestor (useful for
|
|
building reports).</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>You can either enter the ID into a text entry field, or
|
|
select a person from the list by clicking
|
|
<guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button. In the latter case, the
|
|
ID will appear in the text field after the selection was
|
|
made.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Is an ancestor of person at least N generations away</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people who are ancestors of the specified
|
|
person and are at least N generations away from that person in
|
|
their lineage. For example, using this rule with the value of 2
|
|
for the number of generations will match grandparents,
|
|
great-grandparents, etc., but not the parents of the specified
|
|
person.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Is an ancestor of person not more than N generations
|
|
away</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people who are ancestors of the specified
|
|
person and are no more than N generations away from that person in
|
|
their lineage. For example, using this rule with the value of 2
|
|
for the number of generations will match parents and grandparents,
|
|
but not great-grandparents, etc., of the specified person.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Has a common ancestor with</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people who have common ancestors with the
|
|
specified person.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Has a common ancestor with filter match</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people who have common ancestors with
|
|
someone who is matched by the specified filter. The specified
|
|
filter name should be selected from the menu.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Is an ancestor of filter match</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people who are ancestors of someone who is
|
|
matched by the specified filter. The specified filter name should
|
|
be selected from the menu.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="filtref-descendant">
|
|
<title>Descendant filters</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>This category includes the following rules that match people based
|
|
on their descendant relations to other people:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Is a descendant of</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people who are descendants of the
|
|
specified person. The Inclusive option determines whether the
|
|
specified person should be considered his/her own descendant
|
|
(useful for building reports).</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>You can either enter the ID into a text entry field, or
|
|
select a person from the list by clicking
|
|
<guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button. In the latter case, the
|
|
ID will appear in the text field after the selection was
|
|
made.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Is a descendant of person at least N generations away</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people who are descendants of the
|
|
specified person and are at least N generations away from that
|
|
person in their lineage. For example, using this rule with the
|
|
value of 2 for the number of generations will match grandchildren,
|
|
great-grandchildren, etc., but not the children of the specified
|
|
person.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Is a descendant of person not more than N generations
|
|
away</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people who are descendants of the
|
|
specified person and are no more than N generations away from that
|
|
person in their lineage. For example, using this rule with the
|
|
value of 2 for the number of generations will match children and
|
|
grandchildren, but not great-grandchildren, etc., of the specified
|
|
person.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Is a descendant of filter match</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people who are descendants of someone who
|
|
is matched by the specified filter. The specified filter name
|
|
should be selected from the menu.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Is a descendant family member of</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule not only matches people who are descendants of the
|
|
specified person, but also those descendants' spouses.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="filtref-relat">
|
|
<title>Relationship filters</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>This category includes the following rules that match people based
|
|
on their mutual relationship:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Relationship path between two people</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches all ancestors of both people back to their
|
|
common ancestors (if exist). This produces the "relationship path"
|
|
between these two people, through their common ancestors.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>You can either enter the ID of each person into the
|
|
appropriate text entry fields, or select people from the list by
|
|
clicking their <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> buttons. In the
|
|
latter case, the ID will appear in the text field after the
|
|
selection was made.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="filtref-misc">
|
|
<title>Miscellaneous filters</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>This category includes the following rules which do not naturally
|
|
fit into any of the above categories:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Has the personal attribute</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people who have the personal attribute of
|
|
the specified value. The specified personal attribute name should
|
|
be selected from the menu. The specified value should be typed
|
|
into the text entry field.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Has the family attribute</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people who have the family attribute of
|
|
the specified value. The specified family attribute should be
|
|
selected from the menu. The specified value should be typed into
|
|
the text entry field.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Matches the filter named</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This rule matches people who are matched by the specified
|
|
filter. The specified filter name should be selected from the
|
|
menu.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
</appendix>
|
|
|
|
<appendix id="append-cmdline">
|
|
<title>Command line reference</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>This appendix provides the reference to the command line
|
|
capabilities available when launching GRAMPS from the terminal.</para>
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>GRAMPS was designed to be an interactive program. Therefore it
|
|
uses graphical display and cannot run from the true non-graphical
|
|
console. It would take an enormous amount of effort to enable it to run
|
|
in a text-only terminal. This is why the set of command line options
|
|
does not aim to completely get rid of dependency on the graphical
|
|
display. Rather, it merely makes certain (typical) tasks more
|
|
convenient. It also allows one to execute these tasks from the scripts.
|
|
However, the graphical display must be accessible at all times!</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>To summarize, the use of the command line options provides
|
|
non-interactive behavior, but does not get rid of graphical display
|
|
dependency. Take it or leave it!</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="cmdline-options">
|
|
<title>Available options</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>This section provides the reference list of all command line
|
|
options available in GRAMPS. If you want to know more than just a list
|
|
of options, see next sections: <xref linkend="cmdline-operation" /> and
|
|
<xref linkend="cmdline-examples" />.</para>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="cmdline-opt-format">
|
|
<title>Format options</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>The format of any file destined for opening, importing, or
|
|
exporting can be specified with the <command>-f
|
|
<replaceable>format</replaceable></command> option. The acceptable
|
|
<replaceable>format</replaceable> values are listed below.</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>grdb</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>GRAMPS database. This format is available for opening,
|
|
import, and export. When not specified, it can be guessed if the
|
|
filename ends with .grdb</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>gramps-xml</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>GRAMPS XML database. This format is available for opening,
|
|
import, and export. When not specified, it can be guessed if the
|
|
filename ends with .gramps</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>gedcom</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>GEDCOM file. This format is available for opening, import,
|
|
and export. When not specified, it can be guessed if the
|
|
filename ends with .ged</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>gramps-pkg</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>GRAMPS package. This format is available for import and
|
|
export. When not specified, it can be guessed if the filename
|
|
ends with .gpkg</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>geneweb</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>GeneWen file This format is available for import and
|
|
export. When not specified, it can be guessed if the filename
|
|
ends with .gw</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>wft</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Web Family Tree. This format is available for export only.
|
|
When not specified, it can be guessed if the filename ends with
|
|
.wft</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>iso</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>CD image. This format is available for export only. It
|
|
must always be specified explicitly.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="cmdline-opt-open">
|
|
<title>Opening options</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>There are two ways to give GRAMPS the name of the file to be
|
|
opened:</para>
|
|
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>supply bare file name</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>use the <command>-O <filename>filename</filename></command>
|
|
or <command>-open=<filename>filename</filename></command>
|
|
option</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
|
|
<para>If the filename is given without any option flag, the attempt to
|
|
open the file will be made, and then the interactive GRAMPS session
|
|
will be launched.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>If no option is given, just the file name, GRAMPS will ignore
|
|
the rest of the command line arguments. Use the -O flag to open the
|
|
file and do something with the data.</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<para>The format can be specified with the <command>-f
|
|
<replaceable>format</replaceable></command> or
|
|
<command>--format=<replaceable>format</replaceable></command> option,
|
|
immediately following the <filename>filename</filename>. If not
|
|
specified, the guess will be attempted based on the
|
|
<filename>filename</filename>.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>Only grdb, gramps-xml, and gedcom formats can be opened
|
|
directly. For other formats, you will need to use the import option
|
|
which will set up the empty database and then import data into
|
|
it.</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>Only a single file can be opened. If you need to combine data
|
|
from several sources, you will need to use the import option.</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="cmdline-opt-import">
|
|
<title>Import options</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>The files destined for import can be specified with the
|
|
<command>-i <filename>filename</filename></command> or
|
|
<command>--import=<filename>filename</filename></command> option. The
|
|
format can be specified with the <command>-f
|
|
<replaceable>format</replaceable></command> or
|
|
<command>--format=<replaceable>format</replaceable></command> option,
|
|
immediately following the <filename>filename</filename>. If not
|
|
specified, the guess will be attempted based on the
|
|
<filename>filename</filename>.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>More than one file can be imported in one command. If this is
|
|
the case, GRAMPS will incorporate the data from the next file into
|
|
the database available at the moment.</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<para>When more than one input file is given, each has to be preceded
|
|
by <command>-i</command> flag. The files are imported in the specified
|
|
order, i.e. <command> -i <filename>file1</filename> -i
|
|
<filename>file2</filename> </command> and <command> -i
|
|
<filename>file2</filename> -i <filename>file1</filename> </command>
|
|
might produce different GRAMPS IDs in the resulting database.</para>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="cmdline-opt-export">
|
|
<title>Export options</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>The files destined for export can be specified with the
|
|
<command>-o <filename>filename</filename></command> or
|
|
<command>--output=<filename>filename</filename></command> option. The
|
|
format can be specified with the <command>-f</command> option
|
|
immediately following the <filename>filename</filename>. If not
|
|
specified, the guess will be attempted based on the
|
|
<filename>filename</filename>. For iso format, the
|
|
<filename>filename</filename> is actually the name of directory the
|
|
GRAMPS database will be written into. For grdb, gramps-xml, gedcom,
|
|
wft, geneweb, and gramps-pkg, the <filename>filename</filename> is the
|
|
name of the resulting file.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>More than one file can be exported in one command. If this is
|
|
the case, GRAMPS will attempt to write several files using the data
|
|
from the database available at the moment.</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<para>When more than one output file is given, each has to be preceded
|
|
by <command>-o</command> flag. The files are written one by one, in
|
|
the specified order.</para>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
|
|
<sect2 id="cmdline-opt-action">
|
|
<title>Action options</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>The action to perform on the imported data can be specified with
|
|
the <command>-a <replaceable>action</replaceable></command> or
|
|
<command>--action=<replaceable>action</replaceable></command> option.
|
|
This is done after all imports are successfully completed.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>Currently available actions are:</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>summary</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This action is the same as <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Reports</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guisubmenu>View</guisubmenu>
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Summary</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice></para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>check</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This action is the same as <menuchoice>
|
|
<guimenu>Tools</guimenu>
|
|
|
|
<guisubmenu>Database Processing</guisubmenu>
|
|
|
|
<guimenuitem>Check and Repair</guimenuitem>
|
|
</menuchoice>.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>report</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This action allows producing reports from the command
|
|
line. As reports generally have many options of their own, this
|
|
action should be followed by the report option string. The
|
|
string is given using the <command>-p
|
|
<replaceable>option_string</replaceable></command> or
|
|
<command>--options=<replaceable>option_string</replaceable></command>
|
|
option.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>The report option string should satisfy the following
|
|
conditions:</para>
|
|
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>It must not contain any spaces. If some arguments
|
|
need to include spaces, the string should be enclosed with
|
|
quotation marks.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Option string must list pairs of option names and
|
|
values.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Within a pair, option name and value must be
|
|
separated by the equal sign.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Different pairs must be separated by commas.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
|
|
<para>Most of the report options are specific for every report.
|
|
However, there some common options.</para>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>name=report_name</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This mandatory option determines which report will
|
|
be generated. If the supplied report_name does not
|
|
correspond to any available report, the error message will
|
|
be printed followed by the list of available
|
|
reports.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>show=all</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This will produce the list of names for all options
|
|
available for a given report.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>show=option_name</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>This will print the description of the functionality
|
|
supplied by the option_name, as well as what are the
|
|
acceptable types and values for this option.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<para>Use the above options to find out everything about a given
|
|
report.</para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>If an option is not supplied, the last used value will
|
|
be used. If this report has never been generated before, then
|
|
the value from last generated report will be used when
|
|
applicable. Otherwise, the default value will be used.</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
|
|
<para>When more than one output action is given, each has to be
|
|
preceded by <command>-a</command> flag. The actions are performed one
|
|
by one, in the specified order.</para>
|
|
</sect2>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="cmdline-operation">
|
|
<title>Operation</title>
|
|
|
|
<itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>If the first argument on the command line does not start with
|
|
dash (i.e. no flag), GRAMPS will attempt to open the file with the
|
|
name given by the first argument and start interactive session,
|
|
ignoring the rest of the command line arguments.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>If the <command>-O</command> flag is given, then GRAMPS will
|
|
try opening the supplied file name and then work with that data, as
|
|
instructed by the further command line parameters.</para>
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>Only one file can be opened in a single invocation of
|
|
GRAMPS. If you need to get data from multiple sources, use the
|
|
importing options by using <command>-i</command> flag.</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>With or without the <command>-O</command> flag, there could be
|
|
multiple imports, exports, and actions specified further on the
|
|
command line by using <command>-i</command>, <command>-o</command>,
|
|
and <command>-a</command> flags.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>The order of <command>-i</command>, <command>-o</command>, or
|
|
<command>-a</command> options with respect to each does not matter.
|
|
The actual execution order always is: all imports (if any) -> all
|
|
exports (if any) -> all actions (if any).</para>
|
|
|
|
<note>
|
|
<para>But opening must always be first!</para>
|
|
</note>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>If no <command>-O</command> or <command>-i</command> option is
|
|
given, GRAMPS will launch its main window and start the usual
|
|
interactive session with the empty database, since there is no data
|
|
to process, anyway.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>If no <command>-o</command> or <command>-a</command> options
|
|
are given, GRAMPS will launch its main window and start the usual
|
|
interactive session with the database resulted from opening and all
|
|
imports (if any). This database resides in the
|
|
<filename>import_db.grdb</filename> file under the
|
|
<filename>~/.gramps/import/</filename> directory.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Any errors encountered during import, export, or action, will
|
|
be either dumped to stdout (if these are exceptions handled by
|
|
GRAMPS) or or to stderr (if these are not handled). Use usual shell
|
|
redirections of stdout and stderr to save messages and errors in
|
|
files.</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
|
|
<sect1 id="cmdline-examples">
|
|
<title>Examples</title>
|
|
|
|
<variablelist>
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>To import four databases (whose formats can be determined from
|
|
their names) and then check the resulting database for errors, one
|
|
may type:</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para><command>gramps -i<filename>file1.ged</filename> -i
|
|
<filename>file2.gpkg</filename> -i
|
|
<filename>~/db3.gramps</filename> -i
|
|
<filename>file4.wft</filename> -a
|
|
<filename>check</filename></command></para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>To explicitly specify the formats in the above example, append
|
|
filenames with appropriate <command>-f</command> options:</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para><command>gramps -i <filename>file1.ged</filename> -f
|
|
<replaceable>gedcom</replaceable> -i
|
|
<filename>file2.gpkg</filename> -f
|
|
<replaceable>gramps-pkg</replaceable> -i
|
|
<filename>~/db3.gramps</filename> -f
|
|
<replaceable>gramps-xml</replaceable> -i
|
|
<filename>file4.wft</filename> -f <replaceable>wft</replaceable>
|
|
-a <replaceable>check</replaceable></command></para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>To record the database resulting from all imports, supply
|
|
<command>-o</command> flag (use <command>-f</command> if the
|
|
filename does not allow GRAMPS to guess the format):</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para><command>gramps -i <filename>file1.ged</filename> -i
|
|
<filename>file2.gpkg</filename> -o
|
|
<filename>~/new-package</filename> -f
|
|
<replaceable>gramps-pkg</replaceable></command></para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>To save any error messages of the above example into files
|
|
<filename>outfile</filename> and <filename>errfile</filename>,
|
|
run:</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para><command>gramps -i <filename>file1.ged</filename> -i
|
|
<filename>file2.dpkg</filename> -o
|
|
<filename>~/new-package</filename> -f
|
|
<replaceable>gramps-pkg</replaceable>
|
|
><filename>outfile</filename> 2><filename>errfile</filename>
|
|
</command></para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>To import three databases and start interactive GRAMPS session
|
|
with the result:</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para><command>gramps -i <filename>file1.ged</filename> -i
|
|
<filename>file2.gpkg</filename> -i
|
|
<filename>~/db3.gramps</filename> </command></para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>To open a database and, based on that data, generate timeline
|
|
report in PDF format putting the output into the
|
|
<filename>my_timeline.pdf</filename> file:</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para><command>gramps -O <filename>file.grdb</filename> -a
|
|
<replaceable>report</replaceable> -p
|
|
<replaceable>name=timeline,off=pdf,of=my_timeline.pdf</replaceable>
|
|
</command></para>
|
|
|
|
<tip>
|
|
<para>Use the <replaceable>name=timeline,show=all</replaceable>
|
|
to find out about all available options for the timeline report.
|
|
To find out details of a particular option, use
|
|
<replaceable>show=option_name</replaceable>, e.g.
|
|
<replaceable>name=timeline,show=off</replaceable> string.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>To learn about available report names, use
|
|
<replaceable>name=show</replaceable> string.</para>
|
|
</tip>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
|
|
<varlistentry>
|
|
<term>Finally, to start normal interactive session type:</term>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para><command>gramps </command></para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</varlistentry>
|
|
</variablelist>
|
|
</sect1>
|
|
</appendix>
|
|
|
|
<appendix id="gramps-about">
|
|
<title>About GRAMPS</title>
|
|
|
|
<para>GRAMPS was written by Donald N. Allingham
|
|
(<email>don@gramps-project.org</email>).</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>The somewhat incomplete list of contributors includes (in
|
|
alphabetical order): <itemizedlist>
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Tim Allen</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Larry Allingham</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Jens Arvidsson</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Kees Bakker</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Marcos Bedinelli</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Wayne Bergeron</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Stefan Bjork</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Douglas S. Blank</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Radu Bogdan Mare</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Alexander Bogdashevsky</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Richard Bos</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Matt Brubeck</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Nathan Bullock</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Lorenzo Cappelletti</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Pier Luigi Cinquantini</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Bruce J. DeGrasse</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Daniel Durand</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Alexandre Duret-Lutz</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Billy C. Earney</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Baruch Even</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Bernd Felsche</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Egyeki Gergely</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Michel Guitel</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Steve Hall</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>David R. Hampton</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Martin Hawlisch</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Arpad Horvath</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Anton Huber</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Frode Jemtland</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Mark Knoop</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Greg Kuperberg</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Arkadiusz Lipiec</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Lars Kr. Lundin</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Radek Malcic</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Benny Malengier</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Leonid Mamtchenkov</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Brian Matherly</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Tino Meinen</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Serge Noiraud</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Frederick Noronha</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Jeffrey C. Ollie</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Jiri Pejchal</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Donald A. Peterson</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Guillaume Pratte</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Alexandre Prokoudine</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Laurent Protois</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Matthieu Pupat</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Jérôme Rapinat</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Trevor Rhodes</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Alexander Roitman</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Soren Roug</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Jason Salaz</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Julio Sanchez</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Bernd Schandl</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Martin Senftleben</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Yaakov Selkowitz</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Gary Shao</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Arturas Sleinius</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Jim Smart</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Steve Swales</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Eero Tamminen</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Samuel Tardieu</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Richard Taylor</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>James Treacy</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Lubo Vasko</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Sebastian Voecking</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Xing Wang</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Tim Waugh</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
|
|
<listitem>
|
|
<para>Jesper Zedlitz</para>
|
|
</listitem>
|
|
</itemizedlist> If you know of somebody else who should be listed here,
|
|
please let us know.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>To find more information about GRAMPS, please visit the <ulink
|
|
type="http" url="http://gramps-project.org">GRAMPS Project Web
|
|
page</ulink>.</para>
|
|
|
|
<para>To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding this application or
|
|
this manual, use the help menu in GRAMPS, or follow the directions on
|
|
<ulink type="http" url="http://gramps.sourceforce.net/contact.html">this
|
|
site.</ulink></para>
|
|
|
|
<para>This program is distributed under the terms of the GNU General
|
|
Public license as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
|
|
version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. A copy of
|
|
this license can be found at this <ulink type="help"
|
|
url="ghelp:gpl">link</ulink>, or in the file COPYING included with the
|
|
source code of this program.</para>
|
|
|
|
</appendix>
|
|
</book>
|